Jdsu mts 8000 инструкция по применению

• Contents

• Table of Contents

• Bookmarks

Summary of Contents for JDS Uniphase T-BERD MTS 8000

Как пользоваться?

Руководство по эксплуатации JDS Uniphase Portable Optical Network Tester MTS-8000

8100 Modules SeriesPortable, modular platform designed for the construction, validation and maintenance of optical fiber networks

User Manual

8100 Modules SeriesPortable, modular platform designed for the construction, validation and maintenance of optical fiber networks

User Manual

Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was accurate at the time of printing. However, information is subject to change without notice, and JDSU reserves the right to provide an addendum to this document with information not available at the time that this document was created.

Copyright © Copyright 2006 JDSU, LLC. All rights reserved. JDSU, Enabling Broadband and Optical Innovation, and its logo are trademarks of JDSU, LLC. All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners. No part of this guide may be reproduced or transmitted electronically or otherwise without written permission of the publisher.

Trademarks JDSU is a trademark of JDSU in the United States and other countries.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows CE, Windows NT, MS-DOS, Excel, Word and Microsoft Internet Explorer are either trademarks or registered trade-marks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other coun-tries.

Specifications, terms, and conditions are subject to change without notice. All trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective companies.

Manual This guide is a product of JDSU’s Technical Information Development Department. This manual gives you the main information to install, start and use the 8100 Module Series.

WEEE Directive Compliance

JDSU has established processes in compliance with the Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive, 2002/96/EC.

This product should not be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste and should be collected separately and disposed of according to your national regulations. In the European Union, all equipment purchased from JDSU after 2005-08-13 can be returned for disposal at the end of its useful life. JDSU will ensure that all waste equipment returned is reused, recycled, or disposed of in an environmentally friendly manner, and in compliance with all applicable national and international waste legislation.

User Manual 780000102/12 v

It is the responsibility of the equipment owner to return the equipment to JDSU for appropriate disposal. If the equipment was imported by a reseller whose name or logo is marked on the equipment, then the owner should return the equipment directly to the reseller.

Instructions for returning waste equipment to JDSU can be found in the Environmental section of JDSU’s web site at www.jdsu.com. If you have questions concerning disposal of your equipment, contact JDSU’s WEEE Program Management team at [email protected]

vi User Manual 780000102/12

Table of Contents

About this guide xxiPurpose and scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiiAssumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiiTechnical assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiiRecycling Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiiiConventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii

Chapter 1 Principles of measurement 1Principle of reflectometry measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Information yielded by the measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Validity of Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Reflectance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Principle of bi-directional measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Principle of WDM / OSA analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5DFB analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

PMD principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Method used to measure the PMD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

The principle of measurement of Chromatic Dispersion (CD) 9

Method of CD measurement used by the Base Unit . . . . . . 12Principle of optical power and attenuation measurements (OFI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Power measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

User Manual 780000102/12 vii

Table of Contents

Attenuation measurements (optical link loss) . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Standards and l0 for different types of fiber . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Chapter 2 Getting started 15Adapting MTS 5000 series plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Installing a plug-in in a receptacle and removing it . . . . . . . 16Removing a plug-in from a receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Inserting a plug-in into receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Universal connectors and adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Adapter types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Switching adapter type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Cleaning the universal connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Installing a new version of the software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Where and how to obtain the new software . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Downloading from Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Installation from a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Installation from the harddisk of a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Installation from the CD-ROM drive of a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Installation from Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Installation from a CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Installation from a CompactFlash memory card . . . . . . . . . . 26Installation from a USB memory stick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface 31Display screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Top status bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Mini-trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Signature of the measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Main display zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Soft keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Selection keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Color of the keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Using an external keyboard, mouse and screen touch (options) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Virtual control buttons bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Equivalence between external keyboard and Base Unit . . . 36Editing text using the external keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Functions relating to display of a trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Display of the results on the trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

User Manual 780000102/12 viii

Table of Contents

Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Positioning the cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Selection of the type of cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Zoom and Shift functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Zoom function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Shift function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Zoom Auto (OTDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Full scale (OSA / PMD / AP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Overlay trace function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Overlaying several traces stored in memory . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Display of traces in overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Adding traces in overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Overlaying the current trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Swapping overlay traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Changing the traces position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Trace resulting from the difference between two traces (OSA module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Removing a trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Removing the current trace in overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Removing all the the traces in overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Quitting the overlay menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Saving when the instrument is shut down . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements 45Selecting the function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Configuring the reflectometry test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Acquisition parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Measurement parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Result screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Real time mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Automatic acquisition mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Manual acquisition mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Multi-wavelength acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Trace display functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Displaying results on the trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Trace/Event functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Criteria for display of an event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Table of results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Information provided for each event detected . . . . . . . . . . . 65Modifying types of events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Table notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

User Manual 780000102/12 ix

Table of Contents

Automatic measurement and detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Addition of markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Representation of the markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Hints on the positioning of markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Deleting markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Manual measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Measurements of slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Result of slope measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Deleting a slope measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Performing splice and reflectance measurements . . . . . . . . 73Two points method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Five points method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Manual measurement of ORL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75ORL on a saturated trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Memorization of the position of events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Fault Locator Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Choosing the function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Test configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Starting the test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Storing OTDR measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Recalling OTDR files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Chapter 5 Bi-directional OTDR 83Definition of terms used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Description of the measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Summary of the automatic operation procedure . . . . . . . . . 85Configuration of bi-directional measurement . . . . . . . . . . 86

Acquisition parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Measurement parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Results Screen parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Configuration of files parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Performing a bi-directional measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Process Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Fiber link check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Measurement process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Trace display functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Origin and End traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94OEO trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

OEO Result table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

User Manual 780000102/12 x

Table of Contents

Automatic measurement and Addition of markers in OEO page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Key <Del Res/Auto Meas> : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Addition of markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Markers display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

File management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Storing OEO measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Recalling OEO traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Test of a cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Warning/errors after pressing the key START . . . . . . . . . 98Warning/errors resulting from checking common configurations 99

Chapter 6 Optical Spectrum Measurement 101Configuration of the instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102WDM / OSA test configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Acquisition Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Measurement parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Parameters of display and analysis of the results . . . . . . . 109

Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Trace display functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Display of the WDM / OSA results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113Table of results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Channel filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Field of application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Using channel filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

EDFA results analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122EDFA test configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122EDFA measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122EDFA results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

DFB results analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124DFB test configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124DFB measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125DFB results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Testing ROADM networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Storing OSA measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Recalling OSA files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

User Manual 780000102/12 xi

Table of Contents

Chapter 7 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement 129Recommended equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130PMD test setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Test Auto Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Manual Mode Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Acquisition parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Measurement parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Results Screen parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Performing a PMD measurement with a 5073XXX plug-in or OSA-16X / OSA-20X / OSA-30X series module . . . . . . . . 134

Performing the reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Remote operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Local operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Performing the measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Performing a PMD measurement with a 81XXX plug-in . 139

Remote operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Local operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Display of results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Spectrum/FFT menu key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Display of PMD results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Statistics results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Table of results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Graphics display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Information messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Storing PMD results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Recalling PMD files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

PMD standards and limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Abacus for a typical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Chapter 8 Attenuation profile 149Recommended equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150AP Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Acquisition parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Acquisition band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Averaging acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Make Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Results Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

AP Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Performing the reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

User Manual 780000102/12 xii

Table of Contents

Performing a AP measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Display of AP results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Trace display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Results table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Storing Attenuation Profile measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Recalling AP files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Chapter 9 CD measurements using pulse delay method 163Configuring the instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Configuring the CD test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Acquisition parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Parameters of analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Results Screen parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1671st analysis window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Min. wavelength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Max. wavelength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Inc. wavelength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Normalized to km . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Making a chromatic dispersion measurement . . . . . . . . 169Measurement process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Conditions of measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170CD acquisition mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Automatic acquisition mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Manual acquisition mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171End of acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Choice of CD result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Return to this chosen screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Information always displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Detection of end of fiber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Functions available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Placing of markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Information displayed for the markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Delay, dispersion and slope results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Information displayed for the results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Choice of curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Functions available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

User Manual 780000102/12 xiii

Table of Contents

Measurement of CD on a section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Acquiring a trace for CD measurement on a section . . . . . 180CD measurement on a section using stored traces . . . . . . 181

File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Storing CD measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Recalling CD files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

CD standards and limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Source function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Chapter 10 CD measurements using phase shift method 187Selection of the CD function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Configuring the CD test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Acquisition parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Measurements parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Results Screen parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Wavelength Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Normalized to km . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Show Measured Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Show Fit Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Performing a Reference measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Saving a reference measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Loading existing reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195

Performing a Chromatic Dispersion Measurement . . . . 196Display of CD results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Functions available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Storing CD measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Recalling reference or CD measurement files . . . . . . . . . . 200

CD standards and limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Chapter 11 OFI Module 203OFI module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Selection of the OFI module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204LTS function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Principle of the optical power and attenuation measurements . 204

Power measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Attenuation measurements (optical link loss) . . . . . . . . . . 205

Connections to the power meter and the source . . . . . . . . 206

User Manual 780000102/12 xiv

Table of Contents

Configuring the LTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Configuring the measurement parameters of the power meter 207Configuring the alarm parameters of the power meter . . . 208Configuring and displaying the parameters of the source . 209

Display of results and command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Result of the measurement in progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Table of results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Commands of the power meter parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Making a measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211Power measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Optical link loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

FOX Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Configuration of the FOX automatic measurement . . . . . . 213

Acquisition parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Results screen parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214File Storage parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Establishing a reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Establishing a reference for loss measurement . . . . . . . . . 216

Taking a side by side reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Taking the reference in a loop-back mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Establishing a reference for an ORL measurement . . . . . . 218ORL Emitted power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218ORL Zero adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Measurement acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Choosing the fiber to be tested . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Making the measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Identifying the distant module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Displaying results for a FOX automatic measurement . . . . 222Sending a message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Manual ORL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Establishing a reference for an ORL manual measurement 225Measurement acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Making the measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Display of results for an ORL manual measurement . . . . . 226

File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Storing results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Recalling files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Chapter 12 Multi Test Access Unit 229Function of the MTAU module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

User Manual 780000102/12 xv

Table of Contents

Manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Auto mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Configuration of the sequence of tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Performing the sequence of tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Use of the script (specific client option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Chapter 13 Broadband source BBS 237Function of the BBS module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Activation process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Remote interlock connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Chapter 14 File management 241File configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Managing tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242File signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243File information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Current directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Rules for naming files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Name of a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Auto store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Fiber Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Fiber ID and Fiber Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Color code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Fiber Nbr Increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Link description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Extremities are different . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Cable Id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248End Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Cable structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

File expedition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Buttons on the right of the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Explorer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Description of the explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

xvi User Manual 780000102/12

Table of Contents

Storage media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Storage media built into the Base Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253External USB storage media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Standard Compact Flash card (8000 platform only) . . . . . 254Remote Base Unit and data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Abbreviations for storage media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Directory edit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Selection of directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Edition of directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

File editing function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Format of files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Easy file selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Multiple selection of files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Commands relating to files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Saving Files from the Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Loading files and displaying traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Simple loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Load with configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Load Trace + Info (with OTDR files only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Display of several traces in overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Link Manager Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Editing function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

CD-Rom burning (MTS / T-BERD 8000 only) . . . . . . . . . . 264

Chapter 15 Macros 267Calling the Macro function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Macro recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Standard macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269File macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Adding interaction to your macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Inserting a dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Inserting a message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Inserting a pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Renaming a macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271The «Overwrite Config.» setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Replacing a macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Removing a macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Default macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272How to use the default macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272How to set a macro as default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Macro playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Storing a macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

User Manual 780000102/12 xvii

Table of Contents

Chapter 16 Printer 275Function of the printer module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Exposing the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Releasing the printer back into the module. . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Loading a new paper roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277Setting up the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Printing a page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Chapter 17 Technical specifications 279Reflectometer plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Characteristics of reflectometry measurements . . . . . . . . . 280Measurement of distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Measurement of attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Measurement of reflectance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Automatic measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Manual Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Typical specifications of OTDR plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Classes of the lasers of the OTDR plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285OTDR plug-ins measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

WDM plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Typical specifications of WDM plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Dimensions and weight of WDM measurement plug-ins . . 289

PMD plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290CD OTDR plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290ODM plug-ins (preliminary specifications) . . . . . . . . . . . 292Information on «fiber» plug-ins 5020TF and 82LFSM2 / 82LFSM4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

5020TF plug-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29382LFSM2 / 82LFSM4 plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

MTAU plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294BBS plug-ins (preliminary specifications) . . . . . . . . . . . . 295OFI plug -ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Standalone power meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Chapter 18 Options and accessories 299References of measurement plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

OTDR Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

xviii User Manual 780000102/12

Table of Contents

WDM/PMD Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302CD Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303ODM Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303MTAU Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303OFI Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304BBS Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Application Softwares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Launch Fiber Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

User manual references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305References of optical connectors and adapters . . . . . . . 305

Appendix A RoHS Information 307Concerned products : 8100 modules series . . . . . . . . . . 308Concerned products : OTDR 8100 Modules Series . . . . 309Concerned products : All OTDR VLR 8100 Modules Series 310Concerned products :PMD and WDM 8100 Modules Series 311

Index 313

User Manual 780000102/12 xix

Table of Contents

xx User Manual 780000102/12

About this guide

The MTS/TBERD series of JDSU provides a portable, modular platform designed for the construction, validation and maintenance of optical fiber networks.

The modules described in this document are applicable for the following platforms:

– MTS 8000– T-BERD 8000– MTS 6000– T-BERD 6000

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

– “Purpose and scope” on page xxii– “Assumptions” on page xxii– “Technical assistance” on page xxii– “Recycling Information” on page xxiii– “Conventions” on page xxiii

User Manual 780000102/12 xxi

About this guidePurpose and scope

Purpose and scopeThe purpose of this guide is to help you successfully use the MTS / T-BERD features and capabilities. This guide includes task-based instruc-tions that describe how to install, configure, use, and troubleshoot the MTS / T-BERD. Additionally, this guide provides a complete description of JDSU’s warranty, services, and repair information, including terms and conditions of the licensing agreement.

AssumptionsThis guide is intended for novice, intermediate, and experienced users who want to use the MTS / T-BERD effectively and efficiently. We are assuming that you are familiar with basic telecommunication concepts and terminology.

Technical assistance If you need assistance or have questions related to the use of this product, call or e-mail JDSU’s Technical Assistance Center for customer support.

Table 1 Technical assistance centers

Region Phone Number

Americas Telecom Products

866 228 3762 World Wide: 301 353 1550

[email protected]

Europe, Africa, and Mid-East

+49 (0) 7121 86 1345 (Europe)

[email protected]

+33 (0) 1 30 81 50 60 (JDSU France)

support.france[email protected]

Asia and the PacificSoutheast Asia, Aus-tralia, and New Zealand

+852 2892 0990 (Hong Kong)

+86 10 6833 7477 (Beijing-China)

All others 866 228 3762 [email protected]

xxii User Manual 780000102/12

About this guideRecycling Information

During off-hours, you can request assistance by doing one of the following:

– leave a voice mail message at the Technical Assistance number in your region

– e-mail North American Technical Assistance Center, [email protected], or European Technical Assistance Center, [email protected]

– submit your question using our online Technical Assistance Request form at www.jdsu.com.

Recycling InformationJDSU recommends that customers dispose of their instruments and peripherals in an environnmentally sound manner. Potential methods include reuse of parts or whole products and recycling of products components, and/or materials.

Waste Electrical and electronic Equipment (WEEE) DirectiveIn the European Union, this label indicates that this product should not be disposed of with household waste. Il should be deposited at an appro-priate facility to enable recovery and recycling.

ConventionsThis guide uses naming conventions and symbols, as described in the following tables.

Table 2 Typographical conventions

Description Example

User interface actions appear in this typeface.

On the Status bar, click Start

Buttons or switches that you press on a unit appear in this TYPEFACE.

Press the ON switch.

Code and output messages appear in this typeface.

All results okay

User Manual 780000102/12 xxiii

About this guideConventions

Table 4 Symbol conventions

Text you must type exactly as shown appears in this type-face.

Type: a:set.exe in the dia-log box.

Variables appear in this type-face.

Type the new hostname.

Book references appear in this typeface.

Refer to Newton’s Telecom Dictionary

A vertical bar | means “or”: only one option can appear in a sin-gle command.

platform [a|b|e]

Square brackets [ ] indicate an optional argument.

login [platform name]

Slanted brackets < > group required arguments.

<password>

Table 3 Keyboard and menu conventions

Description Example

A plus sign + indicates simulta-neous keystrokes.

Press Ctrl+s

A comma indicates consecutive key strokes.

Press Alt+f,s

A slanted bracket indicates choosing a submenu from menu.

On the menu bar, click Start > Program Files.

Table 2 Typographical conventions (Continued)

Description Example

This symbol represents a general hazard.

xxiv User Manual 780000102/12

About this guideConventions

Table 5 Safety definitions

This symbol represents a risk of electrical shock.

NOTEThis symbol represents a Note indicating related information or tip.

This symbol, located on the equipment or its packaging, indicates that the equipment must not be disposed of in a land-fill site or as munici-pal waste, and should be disposed of according to your national regu-lations.

WARNINGIndicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTIONIndicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.

User Manual 780000102/12 xxv

About this guideConventions

xxvi User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 1 Principles of measurement

1

This chapter gives the principles of the measurements made by the reflectometer (OTDR) plug-ins, OSA spectrum analyzers (WDM tech-nology) and PMD analyzers (Polarization mode dispersion).

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

– “Principle of reflectometry measurements” on page 2– “Principle of bi-directional measurement” on page 4– “Principle of WDM / OSA analysis” on page 5– “PMD principle” on page 7– “The principle of measurement of Chromatic Dispersion (CD)” on

page 9– “Principle of optical power and attenuation measurements (OFI)” on

page 13– “Standards and l0 for different types of fiber” on page 14

User Manual 780000102/12 1

Chapter 1 Principles of measurementPrinciple of reflectometry measurements

Principle of reflectometry measurementsOptical time domain reflectometry consists in injecting a light pulse into one end of the optical fiber to be analyzed and observing, at the same end, the optical intensity passing through the fiber in the opposite direc-tion to the propagation of the pulse.

The signal detected is exponentially diminishing in form, typical of the phenomenon of backscattering, with superimposed peaks due to reflec-tions from the ends of the fiber or other variations in the refractive index.

Information yielded by the measurement

From a backscatter trace it is possible, in particular, to determine the position of a section of fiber within a link.

The measurement result must reveal:

– the attenuation– the location of faults, by their distance from a point of origin,– attenuation with respect to distance (dB/km)– the reflectance of a reflective event or a link.

Fig. 1 Trace showing typical backscattering

To locate faults, a reflectometer measures only time. Consequently, group velocity must be introduced in order to determine the distance of the location. This is done by introducing the refractive index of the fiber into the instrument.

2 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 1 Principles of measurementPrinciple of reflectometry measurements

Validity of Measurement

UTI-T, in recommendations G.650, G.651 and G.652, give backscatter measurement as an alternative method for measuring attenuation, the method of reference being the cut fiber.

The field of application of backscatter is not limited, but the conditions for application of this method are nevertheless stipulated:

– injection conditions: Fresnel reflections must be limited at fiber input.– a high-power source (laser) should be used.– receiver bandwidth should be chosen to achieve a compromise

between pulse rise time and noise level.– backscatter power should be represented on a logarithmic scale.

Reflectance Reflectance is a value with which the coefficient of reflection of a reflecting optical element can be quantified. It is defined as the ratio of the power reflected by the element over the incident power.

These reflections are due to variations in refractive index all along the optical link in certain telecommunications applications. If they are not controlled, they may degrade the performance of the system by perturbing the operation of the emitting laser (especially DFB lasers) or may generate interference noise in the receiver by multiple reflections.

The reflectometer is particularly well suited to the measurement of discrete reflectances on an optical fiber link. To calculate the coefficient of reflection, it is necessary to measure the total amplitude of the Fresnel reflection generated and then to apply a conversion formula to obtain the reflectance value.

This formula takes into account:

– the total amplitude of the reflection measured by the reflectometer.– the pulse width used to measure the amplitude of the reflection (in

nanoseconds) – the backscatter coefficient of the fiber used:– typical values of the backscatter coefficient for a pulse of 1 ns and

— for a single-mode fiber:-79 dB to 1310 nm -81 dB to 1550 nm and 1625 nm — for a multi-mode fiber:-70 dB to 850 nm -75 dB to 1300 nm

User Manual 780000102/12 3

Chapter 1 Principles of measurementPrinciple of bi-directional measurement

Principle of bi-directional measurementIf fibers with different mode-field diameters (core size etc.) are joined, the resulting OTDR trace waveform can show a higher backscattering level. This is due to the increased level of backscattered signal reflected back to the OTDR in the downstream fiber.

This phenomenon can occur when jointing different types of fiber in multi-mode or 2 fibers with different backscattering coefficients.

The sum gives the bi-directional or average splice loss value:

NOTETo measure the widest range of reflection coefficient, it is necessary to insert a variable optical attenuator between the reflectometer and the link to be tested. This attenuator enables the level of the trace to be adjusted so as to avoid saturation of the reflectometer by the reflection to be evaluated.

Fig. 2 Normal splice

Fig. 3 Positive splice (A ->B) / Negative Splice (B -> A)

S S1 S2+2

——————-=

4 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 1 Principles of measurementPrinciple of WDM / OSA analysis

Bi-directionnal measurement consists in performing a measurement from the extremity of fiber A, then another measurement from the extremity of fiber B, finally get events of both traces and calculate the average for all slope, splice and reflectance measurements.

Principle of WDM / OSA analysis WDM (Wavelength Division Multiplex) technology is a very effective means of increasing the transmission of fibers, as it demands neither the installation of new links, nor any increase in transmission speed. The data are transmitted along the fiber at different wavelengths, each wave-length (or channel) transmitting a signal. The channels are defined according to the the G-692 recommendations of the ITU-T.

This technology demands new measurements, since it is important, during the installation and maintenance of WDM systems, to check the following parameters:

1 Presence of the channels at the corresponding wavelengths, with no drift

2 Correct channel power levels, without power variation

3 Satisfactory signal-to-noise ratio (SNR): its value is obtained by measuring the ratio of channel peak power to the noise power level of the ASE1 signal to the right and/or left of the carrier. As a general rule, the noise measurement point chosen is the calculated mid-point between two adjacent channels. The noise power level measured is converted to a standard bandwidth of 0.1 nm.

The most important item of equipment for carrying out these tests on WDM systems is the optical spectrum analyzer (OSA). It can be connected at critical measurement points in the WDM system, to the ends of the links or to the amplifier locations.

Measurement results

The optical analyzer displays a spectrum representing all the channels. The measurement results are shown in the form of a complete spectrum analysis and a table of the parameters relating to each carrier.

The optical spectrum analyzer performs automatic detection and measurements on each channel.

1.Amplified Spontaneous Emission

User Manual 780000102/12 5

Chapter 1 Principles of measurementPrinciple of WDM / OSA analysis

The number of channels and the composite power are shown, and for each channel:

– the wavelength– the interval between channels– the power level– the signal-to-noise ratio.

The total power of the system can also be given.

To qualify the amplifier, gain tilt and slope can be calculated. In principle, amplification should be flat right across the WDM spectrum.

DFB analysis In order to ensure the best BER ratio, it is sometimes necessary to be able to test DFB lasers, widely used in DWDM technology.

DFB measurements are the following :

– SMSR Side mode Suppression Ratio : the amplitude difference between the main spectral component and the largest side mode.

– Mode Offset Wavalength separation (expressed in nm) between the main spectral component and the SMSR mode.

– Peak Amplitude The power level of the main spectral component of the DFB laser.

– Bandwidth Displayed bandwidth of the main spectral component of the DFB laser.

6 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 1 Principles of measurementPMD principle

PMD principleThe transmission rate and range are two of the most important parame-ters of fiber optics paths and must therefore be optimized. And, since more and more paths (including those already installed) are being used for transmitting Wavelength Division Multiplex (WDM) signals or for bit rates of 10 Gbit/s, it is becoming all the more important to determine the Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD).

PMD, which is the basic property of single-mode fibers, in particular affects the magnitude of the transmission rate. It results from the differ-ence in propagation times of the energy of a given wavelength, which is split into two polarization layers that are at right angles to each other (as shown in the below diagram). The main causes of this birefringence are non-circularities of the fiber itself and external stress on the fiber (macro-bending, micro-bending, twist and temperature variations).

Fig. 4 DFB measurements

Side Mode Supression Ratio

Min offset

Peak of the main spectral component

Bandwidth

Max offset

User Manual 780000102/12 7

Chapter 1 Principles of measurementPMD principle

The PMD is also referred to as mean value of all Differential Group Delays (DGD) in picoseconds (ps) or as the DGD coefficient in ps/√km.

The mean DGD causes the transmission pulse to broaden when trans-mitted along the fiber, generating distortion, which in turns increases the bit-error-rate (BER) of the optical system. The consequence is that the PMD limits the transmission bit rate on a link. It is then important to know the PMD values to calculate what are the bit rate limits of the links.

Method used to measure the

PMD

The method used to measure the PMD is based on the Fixed Analyzer Method1 which requires a broadband polarized source at one extremity, and a polarized (variable) Optical Spectrum Analyzer (OSA) at the other extremity.

The method used to measure PMD is the Fast Fourier Transform Method (FFT).

From the spectrum, the mean period of the amplitude modulation is measured.

Fig. 5 Example of a time delay between two polarization layers

Single-Mode fiber span

V2

V1

DGD

1.This is standardized by the ANSI/TIA/EIA FOTP-113 Polarization Mode Disper-sion Measurement for Single-Mode Optical Fibers by the Fixed Analyzer Method.

Fig. 6 Fixed Analyzer Method used to measure the PMD

Broadband light source (SLED)

Fixed Polarizer

Rotatable Polarizer

Optical Spectrum Analyser (OSA)

Link under test

8 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 1 Principles of measurementThe principle of measurement of Chromatic Dispersion (CD)

The Fast Fourier Transform Method into a time distribution will give a Gaussian curve and the mean DGD value is determined from this curve (for fiber links with strong mode coupling).

It is not necessary to modify the polarization angle of the analyzer when strong mode coupling is used. For weak mode coupling, an angle could be selected to get the maximum amplitude of the modulation.

The instrument should have a higher dynamic range than the link itself. A 35 dB dynamic range is usually enough for most of the applications, and 45 dB should be used for very long distance networks.

The measurement range of the PMD should be linked with the transmis-sion rate. For WDM applications, it should be between 0.1 ps to 60 ps so that measurement can be carried out for bit rates between 2.5 and 40 Gbit/s. The table below indicates the maximum permitted PMD values for various bit rates.

Tables at the end of chapitre gives:

– a more complete list of the maximum PMD values for different bit rates.

– information about the appropriate standards and limits for PMD.

The principle of measurement of Chromatic Dispersion (CD)Since more and more links (including those already installed) are being used to transmit WDM (Wavelength Division Multiplex) signals, or signals at 10 Gbit/s, it becomes very important to determine the chromatic dispersion (CD).

Bit rate (Gbit/s) Maximum PMD (ps)

PMD coefficient (ps/√ km)400 km cable length

2.5 40 < 2

10 10 < 0.5

40 2.5 < 0.125

User Manual 780000102/12 9

Chapter 1 Principles of measurementThe principle of measurement of Chromatic Dispersion (CD)

Chromatic dispersion (CD) is due to a variation with wavelength of the refractive index of the fiber. This results in delays in propagation for some wavelengths, which broadens the pulse transmitted along the fiber, causing consequent distortions and increasing the Bit Error Rate (BER) of the optical system.

A given speed of transmission is thus associated with a limit wavelength. And for a fiber with offset dispersion (standard G.653 ITU-T), unequal spacing of the channels around 1550 nm is imposed in order to avoid fiber non-linearities, such as the mixing of four waves.

Chromatic dispersion is defined by three principal parameters:

– delay at a given wavelength (in ps)– the coefficient of dispersion D expressed in ps/nm. This corre-

sponds to the drift in delay as a function of wavelength (or to the slope of the curve representing delay as a function of distance at a given wavelength). It is expressed in ps/(nm.km) if it is standardized to one km (its value is divided by the length of the fiber expressed in km).

– the slope S expressed in ps/(nm2.km). This corresponds to the drift in the coefficient of dispersion as a function of wavelength (or to the slope of the curve representing dispersion as a function of distance, at a given wavelength).

The coefficient of dispersion standardized to one km and the slope take into account the length of the fiber (which may be different from the length of the cable due to the helicoidal factor). It is therefore important to know this length with accuracy, failing which the results of the measurement will be degraded: an error of 10% in the length of the fiber will induce a 10% error in the dispersion measurement.

Chromatic dispersion is one of the most important characteristics of a fiber: it depends principally on the method of manufacture. Cable manu-facturers take it into account in order to produce different types of cable designed for different applications and different needs, such as: standard fiber, offset dispersion fiber or fiber with non-zero dispersion offset.

Type of fibre/Corresponding standardCoefficient of dispersion at 1550 nm

Single-mode standard/ITU-T G.652 +17 ps/(nm.km)

Single-mode offset dispersion/ITU-T G.653 0 ps/(nm.km)

Single-mode non-zero offset dispersion/ITU-T G.655 +3 ps/(nm.km)

10 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 1 Principles of measurementThe principle of measurement of Chromatic Dispersion (CD)

ITU-T standards impose measurement of the following parameters (example with G.652):

– wavelength corresponding to zero dispersion lambda0: this must lie between 1300 nm and 1324 nm

– slope S0 corresponding to lambda0: –0.093 ps/(nm2.km) max.– two limit values of the coefficient of dispersion at wavelengths situ-

ated between 1260 nm and 1360 nm.

Chromatic dispersion is not dependent on the time and constraints of installation, and it is relatively insensitive to variations in temperature:

– 0.0025 ps/(nm.km.°C) for the coefficient of dispersion– 0.0025 ps/(nm2.km.°C) for the slope

The only external parameter that can affect it is the type of modulation of the signal itself (most type DFB lasers have no external modulation to limit this effect).

Chromatic dispersion analyzers give the delay value of the optical link unit as a function of wavelength. On the basis of this delay, they calculate the coefficient of dispersion, the dispersion slope and specific values such as the wavelength corresponding to zero dispersion and the asso-ciated slope.

The principle of measurement of chromatic dispersion is described in document IEC 60793-1-42, as well as in ITU-T recommendations G.650 and G.652.

The calibration of the instrument is defined in document IEC 61744.

Fig. 7 Typical curves of the coefficient of distortion for different types of fibre

20

10

20

-20

-10

0

1200 14001300 1500 λ (nm)

Dis

pers

ion

(ps/

nm.k

m)

G652 Standard SMF ( Unshited Dispersion)

G655 Non Zero Disp. SMF

G653 Dispersion Shifted SMFD

ispe

rsio

n (p

s/nm

.km

)

User Manual 780000102/12 11

Chapter 1 Principles of measurementThe principle of measurement of Chromatic Dispersion (CD)

Telcordia has also published «GR-761-CORE requirements for chromatic dispersion analyzers».

Method of CD measurement

used by the Base Unit

There are different methods for measuring chromatic dispersion.

The Base Unit measures the delay of propagation of pulses along the fiber due to specific reflective events such as connectors (Fresnel), doing this for four wavelengths: 1310, 1480, 1550 & 1625 nm. One of these 4 measurements is chosen as a reference for calculation of delays.

On the basis of the 4 results obtained, the Base Unit defines the curve representing the delay as a function of wavelength by using one of the following numerical approximation algorithms:

– Quadratic: A+Bλ+Cλ2 (parabolic curve). – Sellmeier 3-term: A+Bλ2+Cλ−2– Sellmeier 5-term: A+Bλ2+Cλ−2+Dλ4+Eλ−4

It then calculates the drift of this curve in order to obtain the coefficient of dispersion D as a function of wavelength.

It then calculates the drift of this last curve in order to obtain the disper-sion slope.

Fig. 8 Example of curves obtained by quadratic approximation

λ1

λ2

Fiber under test

Delay

λ0

Delay (ps)

Coeff. of dispersion

Dispersion slope S

λ nm l nm l nm1310 1480 15501625 λ0

S0

drift drift D

Wavelength corresponding to zero dispersion

12 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 1 Principles of measurementPrinciple of optical power and attenuation measurements (OFI)

Principle of optical power and attenuation measurements (OFI)

Power measurement

A power meter, is all that is needed to measure emitted or received power:

– to measure emitted power, connect the power meter directly to the output of the optical emitter;

– to measure the power at the input of an optical receiver, the power meter is connected to the end of the fiber, at the point where the optical receiver would be connected.

Attenuation measurements

(optical link loss)

For measurement of the attenuation of power in a complete link or in elements such as sections of fiber, connections or optical components, a light source and a power meter are required.

This attenuation is usually deduced from the measurement of optical power at two points:

Attenuation A(dB) = P1 (dBm) — P2 (dBm)

To perform accurate measurements, the following conditions are vital

– Use one of the light sources of the LTS or a light source which is stable both in time and as a function of temperature.

– Make sure that all connections and fibers and the receiving cell are perfectly clean.

– Use a reference link between the laser source and the test subject. If several measurements are to be made under identical light injec-tion conditions, this reference fiber must not be disconnected during the period while measurements are taking place.

Insertion loss method1 The power meter is first connected to the laser source via the refer-

ence fiber: P1 is measured.

Laser light source of the Base Unit Reference

fiberLink under test

Power meter of the Base Unit

1 2

User Manual 780000102/12 13

Chapter 1 Principles of measurementStandards and l0 for different types of fiber

2 Then the fiber to be tested is inserted between the reference fiber and the power meter: P2 is measured.The difference between P2 and P1 gives the attenuation of the fiber under test.It is preferable to use the same type of connector at both ends of the fiber being tested, to ensure the same connection conditions for measuring P1 and P2.

Standards and λ0 for different types of fiber

Most suitable method of approximation according to trace zone

Fibre non-offset dispersion

offset dispersion

non-zero or homogeneous offset dispersion

Standard ITU/Y ITU-T G.652 ITU-T G.653 ITU-T G.655

Standard IEC IEC 60793-1-1 type B1

IEC 60793-1-1 type B2

IEC 60793-1-1 type B3

Standard TIA/EIA Iva IVb IVb

Approximate λ0 . 1310 nm 1550 nm 1500 nm or indefinite

Fibre non-offset dispersion

offset dispersion

non-zero or homogeneous offset dispersion

1310 nm zone Sellmeier 3-term Sellmeier 5-term Sellmeier 5-term

1550 nm zone Sellmeier 5-term Quadratic Sellmeier 5-term

Complete curve Sellmeier 5-term Sellmeier 5-term Sellmeier 5-term

14 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 2 Getting started

2

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

– “Adapting MTS 5000 series plug-ins” on page 16– “Universal connectors and adapters” on page 18– “Installing a new version of the software” on page 19

User Manual 780000102/12 15

Chapter 2 Getting startedAdapting MTS 5000 series plug-ins

Adapting MTS 5000 series plug-insThe plug-ins of the MTS 5000 series are shorter than those of the 8100 series. Before they can be used in the Base Unit, an extension must be fitted:

– ref. E50OTDRext for OTDR plug-ins– E507Xext for WDM plug-ins.

To attach this extension:

– remove the two screws on the plug-in marked «a» below.– connect the extension to the rear of the plug-in and fix the screws

back in.– stick the adhesive label supplied with the extension on to the upper

surface of the assembly the hold the two elements securely together.

Installing a plug-in in a

receptacle and removing it

A plug-in may be inserted into either of the two slots provided for the purpose.

When a slot is vacant, it is closed by means of a cover-plate fitted with two captive screws like those on the plug-ins.

Fig. 9 Mounting the extension on a MTS 5000 series plug-in

MTS 5000 series plug-in

Fixing screws a

Extensions

16 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 2 Getting startedAdapting MTS 5000 series plug-ins

Removing a plug-in from a

receptacle

1 Completely unscrew (up to the stop) the two captive screws securing the plug-in.

2 Carefully slide the plug-in out of its slot.

Inserting a plug-in into receptacle

1 Slide the plug-in into its slot.

2 When it is fully home, press against the screen-printed surface of the plug-in while tightening the the securing screws. The screen-printed surface of the plug-in must be flush with that of the recep-tacle.

3 Make sure that the two large captive screws of the plug-in are screwed fully home.

Fig. 10 Rear view of the Base Unit (example)

Captive screws securing the plug-in

The Base Unit must be switched off, and if it has a mains power sup-ply, the adapter cable must be unplugged.

The Base Unit must be switched off, and if it has a mains power sup-ply, the adapter cable must be unplugged.

User Manual 780000102/12 17

Chapter 2 Getting startedUniversal connectors and adapters

Universal connectors and adaptersFiber Optic plug-ins may come equipped with a universal connector and adapter selected at time of order.

Adapter types JDSU offers 5 different adapters, all compatible with this connector, allowing the user to switch from one adapter to another according to which fiber type he intends to work with.

Adapter types supplied are : FC, SC, DIN, ST and LC.

NOTEUHD plug-ins use very powerful lasers : they must be connected exclusively to optical connectors equiped with zirconium ferules. Using connectors equiped with metallic ferrules could damage the plug-in connector.

Fig. 11 5 different types of adapters may be mounted on the universal connector

FC Adapter (EUFCAD)

DIN Adapter (EUDINAD)

LC Adapter (EULCAD)

ST Adapter (EUSTAD)

SC Adapter (EUSCAD)

PC or APC Connector

18 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 2 Getting startedInstalling a new version of the software

Switching adapter type

In order to switch from an adapter to another, proceed as shown.

Cleaning the universal

connector

Remove the adapter in order to access the ferrule and clean it using a cotton swab.

Installing a new version of the software

Fig. 12 Removing and refitting an adapter

Pull out in the direction of the arrow in order to release the adapter from the lug holes

To place an adapter, position the handle as shown in order to engage with the the lugs, push hard and pull the handle down

When a new software version is loaded, there is a risk of re-initializa-tion of the internal memory. Before installing the new software, it is therefore advisable to to save the results in the memory, using the Save function in the Memory menu called up by the FILE button.

User Manual 780000102/12 19

Chapter 2 Getting startedInstalling a new version of the software

Where and how to obtain the

new software

The new version of the software can either be procured on a storage medium (CD-ROM, USB stick memory or CompactFlash memory card) from your JDSU Customer Service, or can be downloaded from JDSU’s internet site: www.jdsu.com.

Downloading from Internet

When the software is obtained from the Internet, it must be saved on a storage medium before the software upgrade of the product can be carried out. To do this, on the JDSU web site, open the file entitled README.txt in the folder where the download is located and follow the instructions it contains.

Installation from a PC

The new versions can be installed according 2 methods:

– from the harddisk of a PC– from the CD-ROM drive of a PC

Installation from the harddisk of a

PC

1 Connect the MTS / T-BERD Base Unit into mains with the AC plug, and switch it on.

2 Connect the MTS / T-BERD Base Unit to the PC by an Ethernet link

Do not interrupt the installation process, as this could damage the instrument.

To avoid any interruption of the installation procedure, the Base Unit must be operating on the mains: if the procedure is started while oper-ating on battery, a message indicates that the instrument must be connected to the mains.

Be sure you have configured the Security mode of the equipment to Standard, and not to Enhance in the System Page > I/O Interfaces > Ethernet > Security (see the User Manual of the 6000 or 8000 Base Unit).

NOTEOnce the upgrade has been loaded from Internet, the new version cannot be burned with the CD ROM of the MTS / T-BERD Base Unit. Burn the CD-ROM of the PC, using CD burner softwares recom-mended by JDSU.

20 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 2 Getting startedInstalling a new version of the software

3 On the PC, download and save the .exe upgrade from the web (www.jdsu.com)

4 Once the transfer is completed, and in order to perform the upgrade, the «.exe» file shall be extracted under a root of the PC. The files extracted shall be placed under C: or under a drive created with the following process:

a Put the release under a directory, such as C:8000_Base_Upgrade:

b Open a DOS console, by selecting Windows > Start (bottom right of the PC screen) > All programs > Accessories > Command prompt.

c Then type the command subst N: C:upgrade

d Close the DOS console.This command will create a virtual drive N: (N: is an example)1

5 Go to the driver, using Windows Explorer

6 Double click on the .exe file: A window called «Winzip self extractor», will appear. Check that the folder is correct i.e. the C: drive or the newly created N: drive is appearing «Name:» then press “Extract”. If not, click on ”Browse” in order to select the right drive, then click on «Extract”.

The message «All files extracted ok» is displayed and invites you to click on OK.

7 Press OK.

NOTEUse a cross over if the Base Unit is directly connected to the PC or a direct cable if the Base Unit is connected to the LAN.

1.»N:» may be replaced by another letter if necessary and «8000_Base_Upgrade» corresponds to the directory where the upgrade files have been unzipped.

Fig. 13 WinZip Self Extractor

User Manual 780000102/12 21

Chapter 2 Getting startedInstalling a new version of the software

8 Run TFTPD32.exe: note the «Server Interfaces» address which appears in the TFTPD32 window.Note: TFTPD32.exe is one of the extracted files

9 Run FTP server.exe. An error message will appear: click on OK.Note: FTPServer.exe is one of the extracted filesThe window «Pablo’s FTP server» is displayed. Click on the green arrow (or select menu File > Start).

10 On the Base Unit, press the SYSTEM key, then System Setup: in Utility > Upgrade Parameters > Server address, enter the IP address previously noted (see «9» above).

11 Quit the System menu and then press, in succession, Expert Tools > Software Upgrade > Upgrade via Ethernet.The message «Verify IP address of PC server» appears.

12 Click on Continue.The list of the software versions available on the PC is displayed next to the versions installed on the Base Unit.

More recent version on the PC than on the Base Unit

Less recent version on the PC than on the Base Unit

Identical version on the PC and on the Base Unit

13 Click on Show Prev. choice or Show Next Choice to display the previous and next versions available.

14 Click on Confirm this Choice to start the upgrade of the selected software(s). or Click on Confirm All Choices to upgrade all versions.

22 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 2 Getting startedInstalling a new version of the software

Upgrading begins. The Base Unit is automatically rebooted. Upgrading takes several minutes. At the end, the Base Unit is auto-matically restarted (if the boot version is superior to version 01.16).

15 On the PC, close the two windows opened to perform the installa-tion.

16 Once the upgrade is completed, you may remove the virtual drive (in our example «N:») by using the command subst N: /d.

Installation from the CD-ROM drive

of a PC

1 Connect the Base Unit into mains with the AC plug, and switch it on.

2 Connect the Base Unit to the PC by an Ethernet link

3 Insert the CD-ROM in the drive of the PC.

4 On the PC, use Windows Explorer to open the CD-ROM.Run TFTPD32.exe: note the «Server Interfaces» address which appears in the TFTPD32 window.Note: TFTPD32.exe is one of the extracted files

5 Run FTPServer.exe. An error message will appear: click on OK.Note: FTPServer.exe is one of the extracted filesThe window «Pablo’s FTP server» is displayed. Click on the green arrow (or select menu File > Start).

6 On the Base Unit, press the SYSTEM key, then System Setup: in Utility > Upgrade Parameters > Server adress, enter the IP address previously noted (see «» above).

7 Quit the SYSTEM menu and then press, in succession, Expert Tools > Software Upgrade > Upgrade via Ethernet.The message Verify IP address of PC server appears.

8 Click on Continue.

NOTEThe software versions list does not always appear (cf previous ver-sions) as well as the Show Previous / Next Choice buttons and the Confirm/Continue key. In this case, the upgrading starts automati-cally.

NOTEUse a cross over if the Base Unit is directly connected to the PC or a direct cable if the Base Unit is connected to the LAN.

User Manual 780000102/12 23

Chapter 2 Getting startedInstalling a new version of the software

The list of the software versions available on the PC is displayed next to the versions installed on the Base Unit.

9 Click on Show Prev. choice or Show Next Choice to display the previous and next versions available.

10 Click on Confirm this Choice to start the upgrade of the selected software(s). or Click on Confirm All Choices to upgrade all versions.

Upgrading begins. The Base Unit is automatically rebooted. Upgrading takes several minutes. At the end, the Base Unit is auto-matically restarted (if the boot version is superior to version 01.16).

11 On the PC, close the two windows opened to perform the installa-tion.

Installation from Ethernet

Before starting the software upgrade via Ethernet, make sure the IP adress of the PC server.

1 Press, in succession, Expert Tools > Software Upgrade > Upgrade via Ethernet.The message Verify IP address of PC server appears.

2 Click on Continue. The list of the software versions available on the PC is displayed next to the versions installed on the Base Unit.

3 Click on Show Prev. choice or Show Next Choice to display the previous and next versions available.

4 Click on Confirm this Choice to start the upgrade of the selected software(s). or Click on Confirm All Choices to upgrade all versions.

NOTEThe software versions list does not always appear (cf previous ver-sions) as well as the Show Previous / Next Choice buttons and the Confirm/Continue key. In this case, the upgrading starts automati-cally.

24 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 2 Getting startedInstalling a new version of the software

Upgrading begins. The Base Unit is automatically rebooted. Upgrading takes several minutes. At the end, the Base Unit is auto-matically restarted (if the boot version is superior to version 01.16).

Installation from a CD-ROM

Updating from a CD-ROM can be done directly, if the Base Unit is equipped with a CD-ROM drive.

1 Connect the Base Unit into mains with the AC plug, and switch it on.

2 Insert the CD-ROM in the drive of the Base Unit.

3 Press the SYSTEM key and then, in succession, the keys Expert Tools > Software Upgrade > Copy from CD.The message Insert the CD in the drive is displayed

4 Click on Confirm. The list of the software versions available on the PC is displayed next to the versions installed on the Base Unit.

5 Click on Show Previous choice or Show Next Choice to display the previous and next versions available.

6 Click on Confirm this Choice to start the upgrade of the selected software(s). or Click on Confirm All Choices to upgrade all versions.

Upgrading starts. The Base Unit is automatically rebooted. The installation process takes several minutes. At the end, the Base Unit is automatically restarted (if the boot version is superior to version 01.16).

NOTEThe software versions list does not always appear (cf previous ver-sions) as well as the Show Previous / Next Choice buttons and the Confirm/Continue key. In this case, the upgrading starts automati-cally.

NOTEThe software versions list does not always appear (cf previous ver-sions) as well as the Show Previous / Next Choice buttons and the Confirm/Continue key. In this case, the upgrading starts automati-cally.

User Manual 780000102/12 25

Chapter 2 Getting startedInstalling a new version of the software

Installation from a

CompactFlash memory card

You must be equipped with a CompactFlash memory card with a minimum capacity of 128 Mo.

1 Switch off and unplug your Base Unit.

2 Insert the CompactFlash memory card in which the new unzipped software has been loaded, into the slot on the Base Unit provided for this purpose.

3 Connect the Base Unit into mains with the AC plug and switch it on.

4 Press the SYSTEM button, then successively Expert tools > Soft-ware Upgrade > Copy from CF.

5 Click on Confirm.The list of the software versions available on the PC is displayed next to the versions installed on the Base Unit.

6 Click on Show Previous choice or Show Next Choice to display the previous and next versions available.

7 Click on Confirm this Choice to start the upgrade of the selected software(s). or Click on Confirm All Choices to upgrade all versions.

Upgrading begins. The Base Unit is automatically rebooted. Upgrading takes several minutes. At the end, the Base Unit is auto-matically restarted (if the boot version is superior to version 01.16).

The Software Upgrade from a Compact Flash memory card is not possible if the instrument is delivered with the Application Card reference E80CFAPP.

NOTEThe software versions list does not always appear (cf previous ver-sions) as well as the Show Previous / Next Choice buttons and the Confirm/Continue key. In this case, the upgrading starts automati-cally.

26 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 2 Getting startedInstalling a new version of the software

Installation from a USB

memory stick

You must be equipped with a USB memory stick with a minimum capacity of 128 Mo.

Before installing the upgrade, you must format the USB memory stick (steps 1 to 5).

1 Insert the memory stick into one of the sockets on the Base Unit provided for this purpose.

2 Switch on the Base Unit

3 Press the SYSTEM button

4 Successively select Expert tools > Media utilities > Usbflash Format.

5 Confirm your choice to actually format the USB memory stick.

6 Once formated, disconnect the USB memory stcik from the Base Unit

7 Connect the USB memory stick to the PC

8 Unzip the upgrade files on the PC and transfer it to the USB memory stick:

a Download and save on your PC the .exe upgrade file that you can get from the web (www.jdsu.com).

USB memory keys can be very different.They differ on Hw and Sw aspects, even inside a given brand.

In particular, USB memory keys targeting audio recording are often formatted in very specific ways and the format is often very different from a standard FAT.

For all these reasons, we advise users to use memory Keys provided by JDSU.

In any case, USB memory keys which are recognized by the MTS (a beep is generated when plugged on the MTS) but which cannot be read or written, should be formatted on the MTS with the Usbflash Format utility, in Expert tools > Media utilities.

If a problem occurs with the USB key you are using, contact your Local Technical Assistance Center.

As for any media formatting, please note that all data present on the USB memory stick will be irremediably lost.

User Manual 780000102/12 27

Chapter 2 Getting startedInstalling a new version of the software

b Once the transfer is completed, double click on the .exe file: A window called «Winzip self extractor», will appear. Check that the folder is correct i.e. the USB memory stick driver is appearing «Name:» then press «Unzip». If not, click on «Browse» in order to select the right USB drive.

A message indicating the number of files that have been unzipped successfully will then appear.

c Press «Close».

d Then remove the USB memory stick using the appropriate procedure for your PC

9 Insert the memory stick, into one of the sockets on the Base Unit provided for this purpose.

10 Press the SYSTEM button, then successively the buttons Expert tools > Software Upgrade > Upgrade from USB.The message Are you sure? is displayed

11 Click on Confirm. The list of the software versions available on the PC is displayed next to the versions installed on the Base Unit.

12 Click on Show Previous choice or Show Next Choice to display the previous and next versions available.

13 Click on Confirm this Choice to start the upgrade of the selected software(s). or Click on Confirm All Choices to upgrade all versions

14 Remove the USB key as prompted

15 The 8000 shuts down

Fig. 14 Winzip Self Extractor

NOTEA bip is emitted each time the USB memory stick is inserted or removed from the Base Unit.

28 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 2 Getting startedInstalling a new version of the software

16 Reinsert the USB as required, in the same USB port as previously (repetitive bips advise you to insert the stick).

Upgrading begins. The Base Unit is automatically rebooted. Upgrading takes several minutes. During this stage, do not remove the USB stick. At the end, the is automatically restarted (if the boot version is superior to version 01.16).

NOTEThe software versions list does not always appear (cf previous ver-sions) as well as the Show Previous / Next Choice buttons and the Confirm/Continue key. In this case, the upgrading starts automati-cally.

User Manual 780000102/12 29

Chapter 2 Getting startedInstalling a new version of the software

30 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 3 Graphical User Interface

3

This chapter describes the graphical user interface of the Base Unit used with the optical measurement plug-ins (OTDR, WDM, etc.).

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

– “Display screen” on page 32– “Using an external keyboard, mouse and screen touch (options)” on

page 35– “Functions relating to display of a trace” on page 37– “Overlay trace function” on page 41– “Saving when the instrument is shut down” on page 44

User Manual 780000102/12 31

Chapter 3 Graphical User InterfaceDisplay screen

Display screenThe display screen is divided into a number of different zones. Starting from the top, these are:

– a status bar in which various icons indicate the current functions:– a bar displaying a scaled-down representation of the trace, showing

the zoom zone and the parameters of the measurement on display (signature of the measurement).

– the main part of the screen, displaying a menu or the page of results.

– tabs enabling the user to switch from one function to another (OTDR, WDM, power meter, etc.), as required.

At the right-hand side of the screen, softkeys give access to the various commands. Their action depends on the current function and configura-tion.

Top status bar The top status bar on the screen shows, on the right, current date and time, and in the form of icons:

Fig. 15 Example of display of results (with OTDR plug-in)

32 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 3 Graphical User InterfaceDisplay screen

– the type of power supply: mains or battery, and if the power supply is on battery the level of charge (see Battery management in chapter 2 from the Base Unit base manual)

– if saving is in progress, the icon .– if the Talkset option is present and the telephone is activated, the

icon .– if a remote screen is selected, the icon (or if two users or

more are working on the same Base Unit).– if transfer of data is in progress, the icon .

Mini-trace The File menu and the Results page can include a scaled-down repre-sentation of the trace which may show the location of the zoom zone corresponding to the main display. The part of the trace shown in the main display is boxed on the mini-trace.

This mini-trace will only appear if the trace originated from an Base Unit. Other Bellcore files read on this instrument do not contain the information needed to display it.

Signature of the measurement

A status bar repeats the parameters of the measurement, and in some cases:

– the position of the cursors– a comment– the name of the file when the result is recalled from a memory.

Main display zone

The central zone of the screen can display the configuration of the instru-ment or the measurement, the memory explorer of the Base Unit, the measurement results, etc. Refer to the chapter dealing with the measure-ment in progress.

Tabs When the instrument performs several different functions (OTDR, WDM, Power Meter, etc.), the various configuration or results pages are acces-sible from tabs. To change from one tab to another, the button selecting the page must be pressed. To example:

User Manual 780000102/12 33

Chapter 3 Graphical User InterfaceDisplay screen

– on the Results page, to change from one tab to the other, press the RESULTS button

– on the measurement configuration page, to change from one tab to the other, press the SETUP button

– On the file configuration page, to change from one tab to the other, press the FILE button.

A small icon may appear in the left corner of each tab, according to the status of the corresponding module.

The icon signification is the following :

– No icon : the function is used in a read-only mode (no module), or the module has not been selected.

– Gray icon : the function has been selected but the corresponding module does not currently perform an acquisition.

– Green icon : the function has been selected and the corresponding module currently performs an acquisition.

Soft keys The 7 softkeys at the side depend on the current configuration and the context.

Their use is symbolized by an icon.

Icons shows that the action is immediate when the key is pressed.

shows that the key gives access to a sub-menu.

NOTEThere is a tab for each different type of measurement: OTDR SM, OTDR MM, OSA, Power Meter. The tab of a function is displayed if and only if a plug-in corresponding to this type of measurement has been inserted in the instrument, or if a file of the type of this measure-ment is open. If two plug-ins of the same measurement type are present, then only one plug-in is «active», so only one tab will appear for this measurement. To change the active plug-in, go to the SYS-TEM screen and select it there.

34 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 3 Graphical User InterfaceUsing an external keyboard, mouse and screen touch (options)

shows that the key will quit the sub-menu.

(green direction keys) shows that the function selected by the key will be controlled by the direction keys.

(green confirmation key) shows that the function selected will be controlled by the confirmation key.

Selection keys The selection may be exclusive (only one choice possible) or non-exclu-sive (more than one option available at the same time):

This key offers two exclusive options. The change of function occurs immediately, the first time the key is pressed.

This key offers two non-exclusive options. Pressing the key repeatedly modifies the choice.

Color of the keys When a selection key is associated with direction keys or the confirma-tion key:

– if the function is not selected, the key is dark blue. – pressing the key once selects the function. The key turns lighter in

color to show the user that the direction keys are assigned to it. Pressing more times will modify the choice made using the key.

Using an external keyboard, mouse and screen touch (options)

The external keyboard facilitates input of:

– alphanumerical configuration parameters– comments in the File menu– notes in the table of results– editing characters

User Manual 780000102/12 35

Chapter 3 Graphical User InterfaceUsing an external keyboard, mouse and screen touch (options)

The mouse can be used instead of the direction keys to scroll through menus and make a selection.

Connect the keyboard and mouse to the USB connectors.

Virtual control buttons bar

It is possible to emulate hard keys with Virtual Control buttons

To display these buttons, click once on the top of the screen in the status bar, at the same height than the date and time.

The virtual control buttons bar is displayed during a few seconds. You may click on any of these buttons to obtain exactly the same results than using the real buttons in the front panel of the Base Unit.

Equivalence between external

keyboard and Base Unit

Although it is intended primarily to replace the Edit menu of the Base Unit, the external keyboard can replace all the buttons and keys of the Base Unit except the ON/OFF button:

– The menu keys to the right of the screen are replaced by the func-tion keys F1 to F7.

– The buttons below the screen are equivalent to Ctrl + a letter (see table below).

– The direction keys have the same function on the external keyboard and on the Base Unit.

Fig. 16 Virtual control buttons bar

The virtual control buttons bar can not be displayed within desktop applications (see the User Manual of the Base Unit).

NOTEThis virtual control buttons bar is especially useful when the Base Unit screen is exported on a remote PC (see the User Manual of the Base Unit).

36 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 3 Graphical User InterfaceFunctions relating to display of a trace

Editing text using the

external keyboard

To use the external keyboard to insert a name or identification in the set-up menus, or a Note in the table of results:

– press Enter to go into the Edit menu– type the text– press Enter to leave the Edit menu.

Pressing the Esc key will close the Edit menu without saving the text.

Functions relating to display of a traceThe trace acquired or recalled from a memory is displayed on the Results page: see example on Figure 15 on page 32.

Various functions common to many plug-ins (OTDR, OSA etc.) can be used to modify the display of the trace (Cursors, Zoom/Shift, Event/Trace, Trace/Table, Full scale, etc.). The role of the direction keys and the confirmation key will depend on the function chosen.

Function on the Base Unit External keyboard

SYSTEM Ctrl + Y

SET-UP Ctrl + U

PRINT Ctrl + P

FILE Ctrl + F

RESULTS Ctrl + R

START/STOP Ctrl + S

SCRIPT (Macro) Ctrl + M

← ↑ → ↓

Menu keys 1 to 7 (from top to bottom) F1 → F7

SAVE AND QUIT (EXIT) Entrée/Enter

QUIT WITHOUT SAVING (ABORT) Escape/Echap.

User Manual 780000102/12 37

Chapter 3 Graphical User InterfaceFunctions relating to display of a trace

Display of the results on the

trace

Each event (OTDR measurement) or channel (WDM measurement) detected is represented under the trace by a serial number.

The results of the measurements can be written on the trace.

Depending on the options chosen in the SETUP menu on Result Screen > Results On Trace, it is possible to show on the trace, for an OTDR measurement:

– «No» results, – or «All» the results (value and position) – or only the markers showing the position of the events measured

When there is saturation for a reflective event (OTDR measurement), the maximum value measured is displayed with the sign >. This shows that the actual reflectance is greater than the value shown (for example, if R >-29.5 dB is displayed, the reflectance could be -18 dB)

The reflectance of a ghost event (OTDR measurement) is displayed in brackets on the trace.

Cursors The vertical cursors A and B are used in the Zoom and Shift functions to position or delete markers.

The cursors A and B are represented by vertical lines of different colors:

– in a solid line if the cursor is selected.– in a dotted line if the cursor is not selected.

Positioning the cursor

When a trace is displayed, the key <Cursor A/Cursor B> can be used to select one or both cursors.

The direction keys and move the selected cursor(s) along the trace.

Above the trace are shown the co-ordinates of the points of intersection of the cursors A and B with the trace, together with the distance between the two points.

When a selected cursor touches the right or left-hand edge of the screen, the trace starts to scroll horizontally to maintain display of this cursor.

38 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 3 Graphical User InterfaceFunctions relating to display of a trace

If an unselected cursor has been moved off-screen by a zoom, it can be brought back on to the screen by selecting it and then pressing one of the direction keys or . It will then appear on whichever edge of the screen is closest to its position.

When the cursor function is selected, the keys and move the trace vertically.

Selection of the type of cursor

Two types of cursors can be defined:

1 Cursor on X: only a vertical bar is present.

2 Cursor on X and Y: there is a vertical bar and a horizontal bar. The intersection between these two bars is placed on the trace.

To display the type of cursor selected, click on Advanced. Then select the key CursorX/CursorY to modify the current choice. Each click on this key will alternatively insert or delete the check mark against Cursor Y.

Zoom and Shift functions

Zoom function The Zoom function is used to analyze part of the trace in greater detail. In association with Event (OTDR) or Channel (WDM) it enables rapid checking of a succession of events or channels.

The zoom is centred on the cursor selected. If the two cursors A and B are selected, the zoom is centred midway between the two cursors.

The position of the section of trace displayed with respect to the complete trace is represented by a red rectangle on the mini-trace at the top left-hand corner of the screen.

To define a zoom on the trace:

– select cursor A or B and center it on the zone to be examined– on the Shift/Zoom key, select the Zoom function.– use the or key to increase or reduce the zoom factor.

User Manual 780000102/12 39

Chapter 3 Graphical User InterfaceFunctions relating to display of a trace

Zooming on the different events in succession (OTDR measurement)– Zoom on one of the events detected as shown above.– On the Trace/Event key, select the Event function– Use the and keys to move the zoom on to the successive

events.

Zooming on the different channels in succession (OSA measurement)– Zoom on one of the channels as shown above.– On the Trace/Channel key, select the Channel function

Use the and keys to move the zoom on to the successive channels.

Shift function The Shift function is used to displace the displayed section of the trace by pressing the direction keys.

The horizontal shift is performed maintaining the point of intersection between the trace and the selected cursor at the same level, scrolling the trace horizontally while following it vertically, so that it never goes off the screen.

To use this function:

– Select the zoom factor as described above.– Choose cursor and cursor position.– On the Zoom/Shift key, select Shift.– Use the direction keys to shift the trace in the desired direction.

Zoom Auto (OTDR) The Zoom Auto key alows to go to an optimized display of the trace.

Full scale (OSA / PMD / AP)

To display the entire trace, with no zoom or displacement:

– either press the Full Scale key

NOTEFor a Chromatic Dispersion curve, click on Config in order to display the zoom and shift functions.

40 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 3 Graphical User InterfaceOverlay trace function

– or, with Trace selected on the Trace/Event key, press the button.

Overlay trace functionThis very useful function enables up to eight traces to be displayed on the screen at once:

– either to compare traces acquired on a number of different fibers in the same cable,

– or to observe changes over time in traces taken of one and the same fiber.

– or to compare both curves get for each way of propagation in the o/Back mode.

For this purpose, the Base Unit possesses an overlay memory which can store:

– the current trace, for comparison with further traces to be acquired subsequently,

– or reference traces previously saved on floppy disk or CD-ROM or in the internal memory, for comparison with the current trace,

– or traces of different wavelengths for comparative purposes (OTDR).

Fig. 17 Example of overlaid traces

User Manual 780000102/12 41

Chapter 3 Graphical User InterfaceOverlay trace function

Overlaying several traces

stored in memory

To display up to 8 traces from the memory, deleting the current trace or traces already loaded:

1 Press the FILE button.

2 On the Menu/Explorer key, select Explorer.

3 Select the files of the traces for display (see «Multiple selection of files» page 257).

4 Press the Load key.

5 Press View traces or Load traces + config: as the traces are loaded, they cease to be highlighted in the list of files.

6 When loading is complete, the Results screen appears: the first trace selected is the active trace, the other traces being overlaid.

Display of traces in overlay

– The traces are shown in different colors (the active trace is green).– Their serial numbers are repeated at the top of the screen.– The OTDR markers are referenced on the active trace by the

symbol , and on the other traces by vertical dashes.

Adding traces in overlay

With one or more traces already displayed, to add further traces to the display (the number of traces displayed cannot exceed 8):

– Press the FILE button, and in the Explorer menu, select the files of the traces to be added (see «Multiple selection of files» page 257).

– Press the Load key– Press the Add Traces key: as the traces are loaded, they cease to

be highlighted in the list of files. – When loading is complete, the new traces are displayed in overlay

with those that were already there.

Overlaying the current trace

To copy the current trace into the overlay memory, proceed as follows:

NOTEIf the number of files selected exceeds the display capacity, a mes-sage gives warning that loading will be incomplete: only the trace or traces selected first will be displayed, up to the permitted limit of 8 traces.

42 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 3 Graphical User InterfaceOverlay trace function

– On the RESULTS page, press the Advanced key, then Overlay, then Set New TraceThe current trace is copied into the overlay memory: represented in a different color, it is automatically offset with respect to the new trace.

– A new acquisition can then be started.

Swapping overlay traces

Measurements can only be made on the active trace and not on overlaid traces. To make measurements on a trace in overlay, it must first be swapped with the active trace. To do this, press the Trace key, then the

and keys, as many times as necessary.

Changing the traces position

Once a trace is displayed in overlay, the traces can be adjusted according to the Y axis:

– Y Reset: all traces are on the the same level at the intersection with the active cursor.

– Y Shift: Each trace is shifted from 5 dB from the other.– Y Exact: the traces displayed are on the same position according to

their injection level.

Trace resulting from the

difference between two traces (OSA

module)

It is possible to obtain the trace corresponding to the point-by-point differ-ence between the current trace and the trace in overlay (if only two traces are displayed simultaneously).

To do this, press the 2 Traces Diff. key. The screen will then display the two traces in overlay and the trace resulting from the «Difference».

NOTEIn the case of Multi-trace display with multiple wavelength acquisition: when the START key is pressed, all the traces displayed are deleted to leave room for the new acquisitions.

User Manual 780000102/12 43

Chapter 3 Graphical User InterfaceSaving when the instrument is shut down

Removing a trace

Removing the current trace in

overlay

It is possible to remove a trace displayed. To do this, first select it (see previous paragraph), then press Remove Current Trace.

Removing all the the traces in

overlay

To remove all the traces except the current trace, press the key Remove Other Traces.

Quitting the overlay menu

To quit the overlay menu, press the Exit key.

Saving when the instrument is shut downWhen the instrument is switched off, all the parameters and all the traces are saved, and will all be recalled at the next start-up.

44 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurements

4

Pressing the START/STOP key is all that is needed to start or stop a measurement. However, it is necessary to configure the measurement and the type of results desired.

This chapter describes the different stages in a reflectometry measure-ment made using an OTDR plug-in and the OTDR function of a 5083CD plug-in.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

– “Selecting the function” on page 46– “Configuring the reflectometry test” on page 46– “Acquisition” on page 54– “Trace display functions” on page 60– “Events” on page 62– “Table of results” on page 63– “Automatic measurement and detection” on page 69– “Addition of markers” on page 70– “Manual measurements” on page 71– “Memorization of the position of events” on page 76– «Fault Locator Mode» on page 77– “File Management” on page 81

User Manual 780000102/12 45

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsSelecting the function

Selecting the functionPress the SYSTEM button. If the instrument is equipped with several plug-ins or if the sole module performs several functions:

– use the direction keys and to select the function: the icon under the mouse pointer is surrounded with a green frame.

– select the function by pressing : the icon turns orangy-yellow.

In the case a Singlemode/Multimode SRL Module is used, two icons can be selected on the System Page: for singlemode use or for multimode use.

Configuring the reflectometry test1To call up the test configuration window, press the SETUP button.

Dialog boxes on one and the same screen enable selection of measure-ment parameters, and display of results and fiber parameters.

Fig. 18 Example of SYSTEM Page with OTDR SRL Module

1.if an OTDR module is installed

46 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsConfiguring the reflectometry test

In these windows, the parameter selected is in video inverse. Select this parameter by means of the direction keys and .

The available choices then appear on the screen; they depend on the function selected. Make the choice by means of the direction keys

.

Acquisition parameters

You can choose the following acquisition parameters, whatever the type of measurement displayed on the trace.

If the acquisition parameters are not accessible, check that the OTDR function has really been selected (see «Selecting the function» on page 46).

– Laser The acquisition will be carried out on the wavelength selected (for multiple-wavelength modules): the possible values depend on the modules. All: the acquisition will be carried out on all available wavelengths.

– Mode Choose the mode of detection of events:- Manual: the acquisition parameters must then be configured as

a function of the fiber to be tested. When acquisition is complete, a measurement is made and the results are displayed.

Fig. 19 OTDR SETUP screen (with singlemode module)

Those measurement parameters are only linked to the next acquisi-tion.

User Manual 780000102/12 47

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsConfiguring the reflectometry test

— Auto: the Base Unit starts an acquisition with an automatic configuration making the best compromise for Pulse/Range/Resolution. When acquisition is complete, a measurement is made and the results are displayed.

— Fault Locator:the Fault locator mode allows to detect the end of fiber distance from the origin and, by consequence, to detect a possible break of this fibre (see»Fault Locator Mode» on page 77 ).

— Source (for modules VLR / VSRE / MR / LR / SRL Singlemode / CD OTDR)The Source mode allows to activate the wavelength previously defined. Pushing the START button activates the source in the CW mode.

– Pulse This depends on the type of OTDR module. See «Typical specifications of OTDR plug-ins» on page 282.

– Range This depends on the type of OTDR module. The possible range depends on the pulse length selected. This range is given for each pulse length in the para-graph «Ranges» on page 285. In Auto mode, the range is selected as a function of the end of the fiber.

– Resolution From 4 cm to 160 m according to module. No calibration of the measurement. The choice offered depends on the range and pulse selected. In Auto mode, resolution is selected automatically according to the last two parameters above.

High Resolution: the highest resolution is appliedHigh Dynamic: the highest dynamic is applied

– Delete Traces on Start Yes: as soon as the next acquisition is initiated with the START key, the traces previously acquired are deleted. No: as soon as the next acquisition is initiated with the START key, the traces previously acquired are saved.

For a multi-wavelength acquisition, this parameter is automatically set to Yes.

– Acquisition time- Real time: the Base Unit performs up to ten acquisitions per

second and displays the resulting trace in real time together with an indicator of the state of the connec-tion. This mode makes it possible to analyze a fiber quickly without any memory effect, and thus to check the establishment and quality of the connections.

48 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsConfiguring the reflectometry test

— Manual: Enter the acquisition time wished (from 5 s. to 10 minutes max).

— Predefined Select one of the acquisition time predefined: 10 seconds / 20 seconds / 30 seconds / 1 minutes / 2 minutes / 3 minutes.

Test AutoThe Test Auto key imposes the following parameters:

– Acquisition parameters:Laser: AllMode: Auto

– Saving parameters (see chapter «File management»):File naming: [cable] [fiber name] [wavelength] [pulse] [direction]Increment Fiber number: YesAuto Store: yes

Factory default settingsThe Factory Defaults key imposes the parameters for acquisition, measurement and display of results defined as default settings in factory.

Measurement parameters

You can select the following measurement parameters, in the Measure-ments field.

DetectionChoice of events to be detected:

– Splices:All: all splices will be detected None: no splice will be detected or choose the threshold from which splices will be detected between 0.01 dB and 1.99 dB in steps of 0.01 dB. Factory default value: Auto.

– Reflectance:

Those parameters are valid for all traces present on the screen.

User Manual 780000102/12 49

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsConfiguring the reflectometry test

All: all reflections will be detected None: no reflection will be detected or choose the threshold from which reflections will be detected between -98 and -11 in steps of 1 dB. Factory default value: All.

– Ghosts:Choice (Yes / No / No Analysis) of whether information relating to ghosts is to be displayed. If ghosts are displayed, the reflection icon in the table of results appears dotted and the reflection value is displayed in brackets on the trace, for example «(R:-50 dB)».Factory default value: No.

– Link ORLIf Yes is selected, the results of the link ORL are displayed Factory default value: Yes.

– Fiber end– Auto (recommended) option in which the Base Unit automati-

cally detects the end of a fiber.– 3 to 20 dB (in steps of 1 dB): threshold of detection of end of

fiber. Factory default value: Auto.

– Events after end of fiber:If yes, the events after the end of fiber are detected.Factory default value: No

Total Loss – Before evt: on the table, for a given line, the total loss result

does not include the splice/connector loss of the corresponding line

– After evt: on the table, for a given line, the total loss measure-ment on the table does include the splice/connector loss of the corresponding line.

NOTEIf no result is displayed after a measurement, make sure that the parameter All is selected for the detection of splices and reflections.

NOTEGhosts are detected only during an automatic measurement.

50 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsConfiguring the reflectometry test

With any dual or triple-wavelength measurement module, the user will have access to the macro bend detection function in the test setup. Each event of the selected wavelengths will then be compared.

– Bend: Select the bend value (in dB), using the direction keys and or the numeric keypad.

Index of refractionChoice of group refraction index of the whole fiber.

– User– Either: define for each wavelength (1310 SM, 1360-1510 SM,

1550 SM, 1625 SM) a refraction index of 1.30000 à 1.69999. The selection of an index alters the value of the section AB (actual distance between cursors A and B).

– or, if the actual distance between the cursors A and B is known, enter its value under Section AB to establish the index of the fiber. Selection of this distance causes the display of the indices. The extreme distance values are given by the index values (1.30000 à 1.70000).

– Predefined index – It is possible to choose one of the predefined values given for

certain cables. The corresponding indices given in the table below are repeated on the screen.

Fig. 20 Predefined index values (Single Mode)

Wavelength (nm) 1310 SM 1475 1480 1510 1550 1625 SM

ATT SM 1.46600 1.46700Corning SMF-28 1.46750 1.46810Corning SMF-DS 1.47180 1.47110Corning SMF-LS 1.47100 1.47000Corning-LEAF 1.46890 1.46840Fitel Furukawa 1.47000 1.47000Lucent Truewave 1.47380 1.47320SpecTran SM 1.46750 1.46810Litespec 1.46600 1.46700

User Manual 780000102/12 51

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsConfiguring the reflectometry test

Fig. 21 Predefined index values (Multi Mode)

Scatter coefficient – User Selects for each wavelength, the backscatter coefficient

of -99 dB to -50 dB by increments of 0.1dB. Modifica-tion of the backscatter coefficient K changes the measurements of reflectance and ORL.

– Auto Backscatter coefficients are selected automatically for each wavelength.

The default values are given in the paragraph «Reflectance» on page 3.

Launch cable at start– No All the results are displayed and referenced on the

basis of the board of the plug-in.– Evt 1, 2, 3 The results relating to the launch cable are eliminated

from the table. Attenuation and distances are then measured on the basis of the marker Evt 1, 2 or 3 selected.

– Distance Use the Edit Number key to enter a distance (Min= 0 / Max=10 km / 32.81 kfeet / 6.22 miles) or affect the active cursor value, using the Set Cursor Distance.

Factory default value: No.

Result screen

– AlarmsNo: The alarm function is not active.Fail: This menu lists possible major alarm thresholds that the

user could select. If results are above those thresholds, they will be highlighted in red in the table of results, and the icon will appear at the top right of the screen.

Wavelength (nm) 850 MM 1300 MMCorning 62.5 1.50140 1.49660Corning 50 1.48970 1.48560SpecTran 62.5 1.49600 1.49100

Those parameters are valid for all the traces present on the screen.

52 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsConfiguring the reflectometry test

Warning: This menu lists possible minor alarm thresholds that the user could select. If results are between those thresh-olds and the «fail» thresholds, they will be highlighted in yellow in the table of results, and the icon will appear at the top right of the screen

If all the results lie within the thresholds (no result is in red or yellow), the icon will be .

– Notes See «Table notes» on page 67No: no display of notesNotes: display of notes entered by the user Uncertainties: display of indicators of the level of confidence in the measurement result.Factory default value: No.

– Results on trace Displays:No: the trace alone.All: the trace with results and markers.Graphics only: the trace with markers only. Factory default value: All.

If «All» or «Graphics only» is selected, the reflectometry trace is displayed with a dotted vertical line set on the end of launch cable (if the Launch Cable is defined in the SETUP menu) and a dotted vertical line on the end of fiber .

– Grid if Yes, the grid is present on the result screen Factory default value: No.

– Unit Units of the distances displayed: km, kfeet, miles.– Color (RVB) When overlaying several traces (see «Overlay

trace function» on page 41), you can change each trace color.- Active curve: allows to change the active curve color

. — Curve 1 to 8: allows to change the selected curve color (from trace 1 to

NOTEAccording to the value set for Alarm > Bend max, the trace display will get a Bend selection with the Trace/Table softkey, allowing to display the splice differences in the table result.

User Manual 780000102/12 53

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsAcquisition

To obtain the configuration selected in the factory, press the Colors Default key.

AcquisitionThere are 4 ways to start an OTDR acquisition with the Base Unit:

– a real time mode, in which the Base Unit makes acquisitions up to ten times per second and displays the resulting trace, together with an indication of the state of the connection in real time.

– an automatic mode, which enables quick starting of an acquisition followed by automatic measurement.

– a manual mode, in which the acquisition parameters can be config-ured as a function of the fiber to be tested. The acquisition is followed by automatic measurement.

– a Fault Locator Mode, which enable to detect the distance of the end of fiber from its origin, and consequently to detect a possible break of the fiber (see “Fault Locator Mode” on page 77).

The mode of acquisition is selected after pressing the SETUP button, on the Acquisition > Mode line (see «Acquisition parameters» on page 47).

In the case of the multiple-wavelength modules, the acquisition will be started on the different wavelengths successively if the option All is selected on the Acquisition > Laser line.

Battery saverWhen running on battery, if no acquisition has been performed for two minutes, the power supply of the module is cut off to save the battery.

NOTETo get the default color for each trace, select the trace number and click on Factory Color.When you change the trace color, the new color is displayed at the right side of its value.

There will be no automatic detection if the acquisition has been aborted early.

54 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsAcquisition

Traffic detectionTraffic on the fiber under test is automatically detected and reported.

If the fiber connected to the OTDR module is active, a message indi-cating a signal in the fiber under test is displayed.

Press the START/STOP key to begin the measurement. A message indi-cates there is traffic on the fiber and asks you if you wish to continue or not:

– If you click on NO, the measurement is not launched.– If you click on YES, the measurement is performed, despite the

traffic.

Real time mode Acquisition in real time must not be used if a precise measurement is required because of the high noise level, but it is sufficient for rapid opti-mization of a connection and for observing a fiber in process of utilization.

To carry out an acquisition in real time, after selection of the requisite acquisition parameters (see «Acquisition parameters» on page 47):

– either, if Auto or Manual mode is selected in the SETUP menu, hold the START key down for about two seconds, when the acquisition in real time will begin

– or choose the Real time mode of acquisition in the SETUP menu, then press the START/STOP key.

The red Testing indicator will go on to show that real time acquisition is in progress. The trace acquired is displayed in real time. An indicator of the state of the connection (Good/Bad) is displayed below the trace.

NOTEIf the measurement is validated despite the traffic (key YES), the next measurement will be automatically performed, even if traffic is still detected on fiber.

If the measurement is cancelled (key NO), and the START/STOP pushed another time, the box asking if you wish to continue or not is displayed.

NOTEIf the connection is bad, check and clean the connector / jumpers.

User Manual 780000102/12 55

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsAcquisition

To terminate or interrupt an acquisition in real time mode, press the START/STOP key.

Connection quality indicatorThe connection quality indicator gives the following information:

If the state of the connection is bad, it is still possible to carry out a measurement, but the results will not be very reliable.

Real time display

During an acquisition in real time, you can modify the acquisition param-eters without returning to the SETUP menu. To do this, press the Acqui-sition Param key: you can then use display keys to scroll through the possible values of the various acquisition parameters.

State ConnectionGood The connection is OKBad Possible causes of a bad result:

– There are several connectors close to the external connector of the Base Unit.

– One of the connectors is dirty or badly connected. Replace the launch cable, make the connection again properly or clean the connector of the OTDR or of the jumper.

– No fiber is connected.

Fig. 22 Example of acquisition in real time

56 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsAcquisition

In real time mode, only measurements relating to the cursors are possible, but as soon as acquisition stops, automatic measurement is possible.

The real time mode allows to make Loss, ORL or Reflectance measure-ment using the A & B cursors and the key None / Loss / ORL / Reflect.:

1 Position A & B cursors on the trace

2 Click as many times as necessary to get the Loss / ORL / Reflec-tance measurement between A & B cursorsThe result is displayed under the trace.

Automatic acquisition

mode

The fastest way of detecting faults in your optical fiber is to use automatic acquisition mode. The Base Unit then uses the acquisition parameters (pulse width, range and resolution, and acquisition time) best suited to the fiber to be tested.

Automatic configuration of acquisitionPress the SETUP button, then:

Fig. 23 Example of loss measurement between A & B cursors

NOTEIn Auto mode, since all the parameters have been reconfigured, over-lay and marker locking are not possible during acquisition.

User Manual 780000102/12 57

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsAcquisition

1 either choose the configuration manually: on the Laser line, select the wavelength of the laser (if the Base Unit uses a dual-wavelength plug-in), on the Mode line, select Auto,

2 or select Test Auto or Factory Defaults

Acquisition phases in automatic modeWhen the START/STOP key is pressed, an automatic configuration procedure selects the optimum parameters, after which acquisition is carried out in three phases:

– Phase 1: Choice of the best range to display the whole of the fiber under test.

– Phase 2: Choice of the ideal pulse width and of the acquisition time to qualify the fiber accurately; for example the one that gives the best resolution for a given dynamic.

– Phase 3: Display of the quality of the connection (see «Connection quality indicator» on page 56)

– Phase 4: The elapsed averaging time and the number of averages calculated are displayed. When the duration of acquisition has elapsed, the automatic measurement is carried out.

NOTEThe acquisition can be stopped at any moment by pressing the START/STOP key. Then an automatic measurement is performed, but certain events cannot be detected: a manual measurement must then be made.

58 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsAcquisition

At the end of Auto acquisition, the parameters are automatically updated in the Acquisition menu.

Manual acquisition

mode

In this mode, the Base Unit carries out a number of averagings defined as a function of the maximum acquisition time specified in the Acquisition menu, and then terminates the acquisition. The acquisition is carried out with the parameters previously selected in the Acquisition menu. It may be stopped at any time using the START/STOP key.

To configure a manual acquisition of the fiber under test, follow the proce-dure described below, in the SETUP menu (see «Acquisition parameters» on page 47):

1 Select the wavelength on the Laser line.

2 On the Mode line, select Manual.

Fig. 24 Example of automatic acquisition

Number of averages calculated

Elapsed acquisition time

Remaining acquisition time

Total acquisition time

Auto acquisition mode deactivates the Set Event function (see «Mem-orization of the position of events» on page 76): the measurement is then re-initialized.

User Manual 780000102/12 59

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsTrace display functions

3 On the Pulse line, select the required pulse length from the values proposed.

4 Select the required Range from the values proposed.

5 Select the Resolution.

6 On the Acquisition Time line, select the duration of acquisition.

7 Press the START/STOP key to start the acquisition.The red indicator goes on to show that the Base Unit is in process of acquisition and the screen displays the trace in process of acquisi-tion. The quality of the connection is displayed for a few seconds, then a bar graph shows elapsed and remaining acquisition time.

At the end of the acquisition, the trace is displayed and an automatic measurement is started.

Multi-wavelength acquisition

If the plug-in possesses several lasers, to perform successive acquisi-tions on all the wavelengths:

– in the SETUP menu, on the Laser line, choose All.– start the acquisition (manual or automatic) by pressing the START

button.

The different traces appear in the same window and can be handled simi-larly to overlaid traces (see «Swapping overlay traces» on page 43).

Trace display functionsThe trace acquired or recalled from a memory is displayed on the Results page: see example Figure 15 on page 32.

A number of different functions can modify the display of the trace (Cursors, Zoom/Shift, Trace/Event, Trace/Table, Full Scale, etc.). See page 37.

NOTETo stop the acquisition, the START/STOP key may be pressed at any time. Then an automatic measurement is carried out, but certain events cannot be detected (a manual measurement must then be car-ried out right to the end).

60 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsTrace display functions

See «Overlaying several traces stored in memory» on page 42 for overlay of traces.

The reflectometry trace is displayed with a dotted vertical line set on the end of launch cable (if the Launch Cable is defined in the SETUP menu) and a dotted vertical line on the end of fiber .

Client specific option: Fiber identification box (TR management for Verizon — MTS/T-BERD 6000 only)

The TR box allows to automatically identify the number of the end of fiber. If this number is not the same as the fiber detected, the user will be advised of this incoherence.

Displaying results on the

trace

Each event detected is referenced under the trace by a serial number.

The results of the measurements of attenuation, reflectance and slope can be marked on the trace.

Depending on the choice made in the SETUP menu, on Result Screen > Results on Trace, it is possible to show on the trace:

– «No» results, – «All» results (value and position) – or only the markers showing the position of the events measured

When there is saturation for a reflective event, the maximum value measured is displayed with the sign >. This shows that the actual reflec-tance is greater than the value shown (for example, if R >-29,5 dB is displayed, the reflectance could be -18 dB)

The reflectance of a ghost event is displayed in brackets on the trace.

NOTEAt the end of an acquisition, a beep is emitted in case of alarm.

User Manual 780000102/12 61

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsEvents

Events

Trace/Event functions

1 The Trace function is useful in a multi-trace display, as the direction keys can then be used to select the active trace, which turns green.

2 The Event function of the Base Unit enables the cursor to be moved on to the faults that have been measured and the results of which are displayed on the screen.

After selecting the Event function on the Trace/Event key, pressing the keys , , or once will move the cursor from one event to the next. This function, in association with Zoom and Cursor, enables rapid analysis of the fiber.

Criteria for display of an

event

An event will be displayed if its attenuation or its reflectance exceeds the corresponding threshold selected in the SETUP menu (see «Acquisition parameters» on page 47). Both results for an event will be displayed if they can be calculated. The following table gives some examples of detection of events for different threshold values.

NOTETo display all the events, make sure that the detection thresholds (Splice and Reflection) are positioned on All in the SETUP menu >Detection. To display the results on the trace, make sure that the option selected in Results on Trace is All in the menu SETUP.

NOTEWhile moving from one event to another, the value of the zoom is con-served (unless this is impossible).

E.g.Value of the thresholds

The Base Unit displays a value if the attenuation or the reflectance has one of the following values

Attenuat.(dB)

Reflect. (dB) Attenuation Reflectance

1 0.05 — 60 > 0.05 dB > — 60 dB1

62 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsTable of results

The reflectance of an event is always measured except when the event causes a saturated Fresnel peak or if it is drowned out by noise. In this case, the Base Unit displays > to show that the actual reflectance exceeds the value displayed.

For example, to detect all the splices on a fiber having attenuation greater than 0.05 dB, select the different thresholds of the events to be detected in the menu called by the SETUP key, in the Measurements > Detection window.

Relative measurements, using the two point method, can be carried out by means of the Event function in coordination with the two cursors. For example, you can analyze the total loss on a link with launch cable. To do this:

1 Place one of the cursors at the end of the launch cable.

2 Select the other cursor.

3 Use the Event function. The measurements displayed give the actual distance from the start of the link and the attenuation of the link plus the attenuation of the connection.

Table of results

Two types of tables of results are possible with the Base Unit:

2 1 — 15 > 1 dB >- 15 dB2

3 6 — > 6 dB

1. Example: a value will be displayed at -43 dB. 2. Example: a value will be displayed at -14 dB but not at -20 dB.

E.g.Value of the thresholds

The Base Unit displays a value if the attenuation or the reflectance has one of the following values

Attenuat.(dB)

Reflect. (dB) Attenuation Reflectance

NOTETo display all the events, make sure that the detection threshold selection in the SETUP menu is All.

User Manual 780000102/12 63

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsTable of results

– A table with a line displayed under the trace and giving the type and characteristics of the event nearest to the cursor.

– A table giving the type and the characteristics of all the events detected during the automatic measurements: the 8 lines displayed correspond to the 8 events nearest to the cursor. The line corre-sponding to the event nearest to the cursor is highlighted. This high-lighting moves if the cursor is moved.

At the top of the table, a line shows the generic parameters of the fiber: numbers of events present, total ORL of the link, marker locking icon and launch cable length (if selected).

Change of tableTo obtain the 8-line table, select the Table function on the Trace/Table/Summary key. To return to display of a single line in the table, select the Trace function.

To display a summary of the results, for 2 traces or more in overlay, select the Summary function. An additional window is displayed, with issue highlighted in case of problem, including bend with singlemode, and including propagation delay in multimode.

To scroll through the table, if it contains more than 8 lines:

Fig. 25 Summary Results and Bend Table

In Summary mode, there is neither access to the events function nor to the expert mode because the Summary function analyzes two traces at the same time. Go back to the Table or Trace function to have access to these functions.

64 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsTable of results

– either select the Cursors function, and move the selected cursor along the trace using the keys and

– or select the Event function, and move the cursor through the table, using the keys and .

Information provided for

each event detected

Each event is referenced under the trace by a serial number which is repeated in the first column of the table. The table then shows:

– an icon symbolizing the type of the event:

Non-reflecting attenuation (e.g. splice).

Event with reflection (e.g. connector).

Ghost reflection.

Slope of the fiber (when no fault follows the slope).

End of fiber

ORL measurement

Fig. 26 Example of table of results

User Manual 780000102/12 65

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsTable of results

Event marker when a measurement cannot be carried out. If the event to be added is too close to an existing event, the icon appears on the trace and the table, but no measurement is carried out: to obtain the results for this event, a manual measurement is necessary.End of launch cable: the attenuation and distances are measured on the basis of the corresponding marker.

– The distance of the event from the beginning of the fiber, in metres (or kfeet or miles).

– The attenuation due to the event, in dB.– The reflectance of the event, in dB (or the ORL result if an ORL

measurement has been carried out).– The slope before the event, in dB/km (dB/kft) if it can be measured.– The length of the section, that is to say the distance between the

marker of the event and the previous marker.– The total attenuation of the fiber (total dB loss), in dB.

The table of results is interactive, and reflects the measurements in prog-ress. Any operation carried out on the trace is immediately entered in the table, so that you can see the result.

Modifying types of events

The types of events are detected automatically as a function of their optical signature. This can sometimes lead the system astray, if reflection from a connector is too strong (end of fiber?), if a splice has a very low insertion loss (slope?), etc. Similarly, some types of events cannot be recognized automatically from their signatures (for example, couplers, multiplexers, etc.). For this reason, it is advantageous in some cases to be able to change the type of events.

To do this:

– In the Advanced menu select Manual measurement– Select the Event Code button.

66 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsTable of results

New, more specific event types are then proposed:

Splice

Connector

Mux/Demultiplexer

Separator/Coupler

End of fiber

Ghost

– Position the cursor on the line for which modification of event type is desired.

– Click on the button corresponding to the required type of event.

Table notes With each event, it is possible to associate:

– a note of no more than 40 characters, entered by the user– an indicator of uncertainty qualifying the result displayed.

Fig. 27 Buttons used to modify types of events

User Manual 780000102/12 67

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsTable of results

NotesFor each wavelength, a maximum of 16 notes is possible.

For each note, 40 characters can be entered.

To enter a note:– in the menu: SETUP > Result Screens > Notes, the Notes option

must be selected– on the Results page, in the table, select the event– press Advanced– press Notes– enter the text of the note in the edit menu that appears– press Confirm and then Exit.

In the table of results, the user can display indicators to evaluate the uncertainty of the result. This function must be validated in the SETUP menu, on the Notes line.

The notes are displayed under the selected event, in the results table.

Uncertainty of resultsThe following cases are possible:

NOTEThis information appears in the table, under the line relating to the event, if it has been validated in the SETUP menu on the Notes line.

NOTEEach note is associated with an event. Consequently, if the event is deleted, the note will be deleted too.

Indicators concerning attenuation measurements

2c manual Result of a manual measurement between the reference and the cursor using the 2-cursors method.

5c manual Result of a manual measurement using the 5-cursors method.

Global The attenuation displayed is a global result for Fresnel reflections which are not sufficiently separated.

Close evts As several events are too close together, only the attenuation of the last one is displayed.

68 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsAutomatic measurement and detection

Automatic measurement and detectionAutomatic mode enables rapid detection of all the faults in the trace. The faults detected are then measured and identified on the screen by markers. Only the results exceeding the detection threshold defined in the SETUP menu are displayed.

By means of this method of detection, you can quickly locate all the faults in the fiber under test.

If an automatic measurement does not detect all the events, additional manual measurements can be carried out.

To delete all the markers, press the Advanced key, then select Del Res..

When there have not been any measurements, to carry out an automatic measurement, press Advanced then select the function Auto Mes..

The following procedure is recommended:

1 Fully automatic measurement: the instrument locates the events and proceeds to the measurements.

Indicators concerning measurements of slope

Few pts Measurement of slope by the least square approximation method without using many points of acquisition.

2 points Measurement of slope by the 2-point method.

NOTEThe SETUP menu, Notes line, enables display of notes, of uncertain-ties or of neither the one nor the other. Notes cannot be displayed at the same time as uncertainties.

NOTEBefore starting an automatic measurement, make sure that the func-tion Lock Evts (accessible by pressing Advanced), is not activated (the icon must not be present in the left-hand corner under the trace).

User Manual 780000102/12 69

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsAddition of markers

2 Addition of markers (see “Addition of markers” on page 70) in the cases of splices showing low attenuation and of close events. The Base Unit then automatically measures the slope before and after the markers selected and measures the attenuation of the splice.

3 Addition of manual measurements if necessary (in the case of very close events). The Base Unit performs the measurements requested by the user.

To start an automatic measurement while a measurement is already in progress:

1 Press the Advanced key.

2 Select Del Res..

3 Select Auto Mes..

Addition of markersTo carry out a measurement, it is advisable to go into the SETUP menu and:

– activate the alarm thresholds in Result Screens > Alarms – validate display of results on the trace in Results on Trace = All.

You can place markers of events on the trace at the exact position where you want to carry out automatic measurements.

You can also manually place markers in addition to those positioned automatically during automatic measurement. You can then start an automatic measurement to obtain the results on all the markers.

Representation of the markers

The markers are represented by the symbol : if they are set during automatic measurements or using the Set markers key.

The markers are represented by the symbol if they are set during manual measurements in Advanced mode.

To add markers of events:

1 Select a cursor (A or B).

2 Use the direction keys to move the cursor to the place where you want to position a marker.

70 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsManual measurements

3 Press the key: Add Marker.

4 An event marker is displayed at the position of the cursor and a measurement is carried out on the marker. Measurement of slope before the marker starts just after the previous event (or at the end of the dead zone at the beginning of the fiber); measurement of slope after the marker stops just before the next marker or at the end of the fiber.

Hints on the positioning of

markers

– Do not add markers (with the Add Marker key) after a manual measurement, as all the results will be recalculated automatically by the instrument.

– If two markers are too close together, they will appear on the trace and the table but no measurement will be carried out on the second marker: to obtain results for this marker, a manual measurement is necessary.

– If you press the Add Marker key when the cursor is very close to a marker, the latter will be deleted.

Deleting markers

To delete a marker, move the cursor on to the marker and press the Add Marker key. The marker selected will be deleted and a complete measurement, without this marker, will be carried out.

To delete several markers, use the Event key to move from one marker to the other, then press the Add Marker key as many times as neces-sary. The cursor will be automatically moved on to the successive markers.

Deletion of markers can cause incorrect measurement results.

Manual measurementsAs soon as you have made an acquisition, with or without automatic measurement, you can make manual measurements on any event on the trace by means of the cursors A and B, in association with the func-tions of slope, detection of splice and calculation of ORL.

The manual measurements are accessible in the Results page, after pressing the keys: Advanced, then Manual Measurement.

User Manual 780000102/12 71

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsManual measurements

Measurements of slope

To make a manual measurement of slope, press the RESULTS button to call up the trace and then:

– Place the cursor A at the beginning of the section of the trace where the slope is to be measured.

– Place the cursor B at the end of this section.– Press the Advanced key, then the Manual key, then select Slope. – Press : the slope of the specified trace section is displayed.

*: A yellow icon would indicate there is a Warning alarm (thresholds are critical)

Result of slope measurement

The result is displayed on the screen between the two slope indicators [ and ].

The measurement results are also available in the table which you can display in its entirety by selecting the Table function (after pressing Exit twice to quit Advanced mode). In the table:

Fig. 28 Measurement results

Slope Splice Reflectance

This red cross shows that an alarm threshold has been exceeded*

72 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsManual measurements

– «distance» shows the distance between the beginning of the trace and the end of the slope;

– «section» shows the distance between the previous event (which may also be the beginning of the link) and the end of the slope. Thus this section value is not equivalent to the distance between the two slope indicators [ and ].

– «Slope» shows the slope value in dB/km

If no result is displayed in the table:– the distance between the cursors A and B is too small.

Deleting a slope measurement

To delete a particular slope measurement result:

– superimpose the cursors A and B on the slope concerned– select Slope (after, if necessary, pressing Advanced and then

Manual).– press : the slope of the specified trace section is deleted.

Performing splice and

reflectance measurements

There are two methods of carrying out manual measurements of splices on the trace: the two-cursor method and the five-cursor method.

The five-cursor method is the more accurate, as it takes into account the difference of level between the slope before the splice and the slope after the splice. This method should be used whenever possible.

If very close events have created a dead zone preventing the measure-ment of slope by the five-cursor method, it is possible to use the two-cursor method. This considers the difference in level between the cursors.

Before performing one of these measurements, go into the SETUP menu and define the splice detection threshold (All is recommended). Also confirm display of the results on the trace (Results on Trace= All or Graphics only).

Two points method To perform a splice measurement by the «two-points» method, display the Results page, then:

1 Place cursor A exactly on the fault, then place cursor B after the splice that you wish to define.

User Manual 780000102/12 73

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsManual measurements

2 Press the Advanced key, then Manual Measurement, then select the function 2 Pt Loss.

3 Press .The splice marker is placed at the point defined by the first (left-hand) cursor and the result is displayed on the screen. If the fault is reflective, the reflectance value is also measured and displayed. These results are added to the table of results.

If no result is displayed, it is possible that the threshold of attenuation detection is higher than the attenuation that you are trying measure, or else you may have selected No or Graphics only on the Results on Trace line.

Five points method To carry out a splice measurement by the «five points» method:

1 Measure the slope preceding the fault to be measured, then the slope following it.

2 Place the cursor on the fault (between the two sections).

3 Press the Advanced key, then Manual Measurement, then select 5 Pt Loss.

4 Press .The splice event marker is placed on the cursor and the result is displayed on the trace and in the table of results.

NOTEIf you try to measure a splice on a slope, the measurement is not car-ried out and the following error message is displayed: «Slope found between two cursors».

NOTEIf no result is displayed, it is possible that the display threshold of the attenuation measurement result is higher than the attenuation that you are trying to measure, or else, in the SETUP menu, you may have selected Results on Trace = None or Graphics only.

NOTEIf you try to measure a splice on a slope, the measurement is not car-ried out and the following error message is displayed: Slope found between two cursors.

74 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsManual measurements

Manual measurement

of ORL

It is possible to carry out an ORL measurement on a part of the fiber.

Follow the following procedure to measure a part of the fiber:

1 Position the cursors A and B to delimit the section that you wish to measure.

2 Press the Advanced key, then Manual Measurement, then select ORL.

3 Press . The ORL will be measured for the section of trace defined.

ORL on a saturated trace

If saturation occurs during an ORL measurement, the result is given with the sign <. This means that the actual ORL value is less than the value displayed.

Fig. 29 Result of ORL measurement

User Manual 780000102/12 75

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsMemorization of the position of events

Memorization of the position of eventsTo memorize the position of events with a view to repeating the measure-ments at the same place during a future acquisition or on another trace, press the Advanced key, then select Lock Evts. The event memoriza-tion icon will appear in the title bar.

The positions memorized will then be used in the subsequent measure-ments, either at the end of the manual acquisition, or when a stored trace is recalled.

The following procedure is recommended to start a measurement with markers:

1 Carry out an automatic measurement.

2 Memorize the position of the events with the Add Marker key.

3 Add the manual measurements required (keys: Advanced > Manual Measurement).

CAUTION

If a marker is added (with the Add Marker key) after manual measure-ments have been performed, then all the markers on the trace will be converted into AUTO markers and an automatic measurement will be performed using these markers. The previous manual measurements will be lost.

Provided the event memorization icon is displayed, the automatic measurement following the acquisition is carried out using the markers which were present before the acquisition.

If you wish to make a measurement without markers, deactivate memo-rization of events by pressing the Free Evts key.

NOTEThis function memorizes the markers placed on the current trace.

76 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsFault Locator Mode

Fault Locator Mode

Function The Fault locator mode is used to detect the distance of the end of fiber from its origin. Consequently, il allows to detect a possible break of the fiber.

Choosing the function

1 Push the SETUP button

2 In the Acquisition parameters:– select the line Mode– Select Fault Locator with the direction keys (see «Configuring

the reflectometry test» on page 46).or– Push the Fault Locator key, on the right of the screen.

Test configuration

To automatically set the measurement parameters, push the Test Auto key.

To manually set the test in Fault Locator mode, push the SETUP button. Five parameters have to be defined:

Laser the wavelength of the signal (1310 or 1550 nm, 850 or 1300 nm, according to the module).

NOTETo go back to the standard mode, push the Standard Mode button or deselect Fault Locator in the Acquisition parameters.

Fig. 30 Fault Locator Setup

User Manual 780000102/12 77

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsFault Locator Mode

Auto: by default, select 1550 nm for a singlemode fibre, and 1300 nm for a multimode fibre.

Fiber End the attenuation threshold corresponael (from 2 to 20 dB). Modify the value using the direction keys or the numeric keypad. The Auto position is recommended.

Launch Cable Start No: No launch cable usedDistance: Manually enter the value using the numeric keypad, with the Edit Number key (Min= 0 km / Max= 10km/32.81 Kfeet / 6.22 miles)orSet the active cursor value using the Set Cursor Distance key.

Index of Refraction Fiber refractive index. You can: — choose one of the predefined value given for some cables (see table page 51) .- manually define a refractive index:

— either defining for each wavelength a refractive index between 1.30000 and 1.69999. The selection of an index modify the section AB value (real distance between the cursors A and B).- or, if you know the real distance between cursors A and B, entering this value in the Section AB line to know the refractive index of the fiber. This distance selection allows to display the indices. The extremes values of the distance are given by those of the indice (1.30000 à 1.70000)

Bend (singlemode only)Select the bend maximum value (in dB) or select Auto.

Unit Distance unit (km / kfeet / miles)

Starting the test Push the START/STOP button.

The test configuration starts automatically. Then a baragraph indicates the test progress and the number of acquisitions done.

You can stop the test at any time, pushing the START/STOP button.

78 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsFault Locator Mode

Once the test is finished, the instrument measures the end of fiber distance and display it with the unit chosen. The Total Loss is also displayed.

Under the trace, in the blue line, are displayed:

– the ORL value of the link– the Launch Cable length (if defined)

If one or several bends have been detected, the screen displays the 3 first macro bends detected, as well as, for each one, the distance and the delta loss between the two wavelengths (dB).

Fig. 31 Fault Location

NOTEIf a problem occurs during acquisition, two types of message can be displayed on screen:

— Fiber End not found: fiber length is too long for the OTDR used etc.

— No fiber connected

User Manual 780000102/12 79

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsFault Locator Mode

The reflectometry trace is displayed with, in addition, a dotted vertical line set on the end of launch cable (if the Launch Cable is defined in the SETUP menu) and a dotted vertical line on the end of fiber .

The Cursor and Zoom keys are available.

As with the OTDR mode, a summary of the results can be displayed selecting Summary with the Table/Summary key.

Save the trace pushing the FILE button. Once the trace is saved, it can be recalled and displayed :

– either in OTDR mode (with analysis) if the Standard Mode is selected in the configuration menu.

– or in Fault Locator mode (with indication on the end of fiber) if the Fault Locator mode is selected in the configuration menu.

Fig. 32 Fault location Bend.

80 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsFile Management

File Management

Storing OTDR measurements

Once the measurements have been made, results can be stored on different storage media.

If you had entered Auto store, then the results will be saved automati-cally.

If not, or if you want to store the results under another name, directory etc.:

1 Click on the FILE key

2 Select Setup with the key Setup/Explorer.

3 Modify the parameters you want

4 Click on Store Trace

The OTDR traces are stored with the extension «.SOR».

Recalling OTDR files

Once a OTDR file has been stored, recall it using the Explorer:

1 Select Explorer with the key Setup/Explorer.

2 Using directions keys, select the directory and then the file to open

3 Click on Load

4 Click on View Tace(s) or Load Trace + Config.The selected file is opened

For further informations on file management, see Chapter 14 “File management’ on page 241.

User Manual 780000102/12 81

Chapter 4 Reflectometry measurementsFile Management

82 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 5 Bi-directional OTDR

5

This chapter describes the different steps to perform an automatic bi-directional measurement (also called OEO measurement = Origin-End-Origin).This measurement requires that two 8000 Base Units are connected at each extremity of the fiber under test. Every Base Unit must be equipped with the software option called «OEO-OTDR» and with both optical talkset and OTDR plug-in.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

– “Definition of terms used” on page 84– “Description of the measurement” on page 84– “Configuration of bi-directional measurement” on page 86– “Performing a bi-directional measurement” on page 88– “Trace display functions” on page 93– “OEO Result table” on page 95– “Automatic measurement and Addition of markers in OEO page” on

page 96– “File management” on page 97– “Test of a cable” on page 98– “Troubleshooting” on page 98

It is strongly recommended that the same type of OTDR is used (same reference) at each extremity of the fiber.

User Manual 780000102/12 83

Chapter 5 Bi-directional OTDRDefinition of terms used

Definition of terms used

Master / Slave unitThe master unit is the Base Unit that initiates the measurement at one extremity of the fiber.

The slave unit is the Base Unit connected on the other extremity of the fiber, and connected to the master unit via the data connection.

Local / remote unitThese terms are used in the Process Display page (see «Process page display» page 90). Each unit is considered «Local» on its own screen.

Description of the measurement

Thanks to the software option OEO-OTDR, bi-directional measurement can be fully automatic.

A minimum of two fibers is required. Two Base Units equiped with the talkset option and an OTDR plug-in are linked at every extremity of the fiber to test at the same time. A data connection is established between the two talkset ports of the units via another fiber, in order to exchange orders, configurations and measurement results.

NOTEThese terms are to be distinguished from the measurement direction and extremities of the fiber (see «Fiber Description» page 245)

NOTE

The measurement principle and methods used are described in «Prin-ciple of bi-directional measurement» page 4.

NOTEFor automatic bidirectional OTDR testing, two units having the talset option and the E80 bidirectional option are rquired.

84 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 5 Bi-directional OTDRDescription of the measurement

Please check that the OTDR function has been selected (see «Selecting the function» page 46).

Summary of the automatic operation

procedure

– Test if both units are linked to the same fiber– Consistency verification of the OTDR plug-in between the two units.– Consistency verification of acquisition configuration, measurement

and files, fiber and link definition. Then transfer of the master unit configuration to the slave unit if necessary.

– Acquisition start on the master unit– Trace transfer to the slave unit– Acquisition start on the slave unit– Trace transfer to the master unit– Bi-directional measurement on both units– Results storage in a single «.OEO» file or in two «.SOR» files.

All this test procedure is fully automatic, and all results are immediately accessible on both units.

Example with 8000 series

Fully automatic bi-directional acquisitions can not be performed with-out a data connection (see «Data transfer» in the user manual of the Base Unit, reference 8000M02 for example).

For best measurements and in order to qualify the fiber link and con-nectors, launch cables shall be inserted between the OTDR modules and the link.

User Manual 780000102/12 85

Chapter 5 Bi-directional OTDRConfiguration of bi-directional measurement

Configuration of bi-directional measurementTo access the OEO configuration menu, press the button SETUP from the Base Unit. OEO parameters are now displayed.

Acquisition parameters are the same as for OTDR measurements (see «Configuring the reflectometry test» page 46 for their description). Only different or extra parameters are presented here in this chapter.

Acquisition parameters

Laser Acquisition will be performed on all selected wavelengths, as long as they are available on the remote OTDR as well. If not, acquisition will be performed on all wavelengths selected and common to both OTDRs. Please see the recommendation on page 84 about using the same type of OTDR)

Mode Bi-directional measurement allows manual and Auto modes only. Operation is the same as for OTDR measurement.

Please check that the OEO-OTDR tab has been selected.

Fig. 33 OEO test setup menu

86 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 5 Bi-directional OTDRConfiguration of bi-directional measurement

Measurement parameters

Launch cable start/endThis option allows the user to declare and describe the launch cables at the OTDR side of the other end of the fiber.

No No launch cable on Remote OTDR.Evt1,2,3 Declaration of a launch cable on the remote OTDR,

distance given from selected event 1, 2 or 3. Results related to this launch cable are eliminated from the table.

Distance Use the Edit Number key to enter a distance (Min= 0 / Max=1 10 km / 32.81 kfeet / 6.22 miles).

Default value : No

Results Screen parameters

Alarms the alarms applie to the measurements average, and not to the measurements for each side (as it is in the classical OTDR mode)

Configuration of files

parameters

To access the files configuration menu of the OEO-OTDR tab, press the button FILE.

Related parameters are then displayed.

All parameters to describe the files, the fiber and the link are proposed in order to save all measurements. Please refer to «File configuration menu» page 242. Only differences are presented in this chapter.

File TypeThis option allows to choose to save a bi-directional measurement under two different formats (see «File management» page 97) :

A «.OEO» file The bi-directional measurement is saved in a single file

Two «.SOR» files The bi-directional measurement is saved in two different «.SOR» files

NOTEFor best use, it is recommended to use the auto file naming (with fiber code, origin, end, lambda, fiber name and auto-store). These parame-ters are applied on the master Base Unit.

User Manual 780000102/12 87

Chapter 5 Bi-directional OTDRPerforming a bi-directional measurement

Performing a bi-directional measurement

Process Display

The Process page displays the bi-directional measurement steps, whereas the Curve page displays the traces and results.

In order to display the Process page, make sure you are currently under the OEO-OTDR tab, and press the key RESULTS.

The key View Curves/View Process allows to change from the Curve page to the Process page and vice versa.

In order to select and follow the status of a measurement, go to the Process page.

The Process screen is divided in three zones :

1 Information zone:– Representation of the local Base Unit, with identification1

– Representation of the distant Base Unit, with identification2 – Status of the data connection : grayed when the link has been

cut or the connection not yet established, yellow when the connection is operational

– Status of the fiber connection : this is the status of the last tested fiber. The fiber is represented cut and is grayed if the two units are not connected on the same fiber. If the two units are connected on the same fiber, the link does not appear cut. When a measurement is processed, the fiber is displayed in red

– When the fiber connection is established, information providing the module type and available wavelengths is displayed for both local and distant units

2 User guide zone:

NOTEWhen a measurement has been started, the slave Base Unit automat-ically displays the Process page.

1.includes the serial numbers of the mainframe and module as well as available wavelengths2.requires active data connection

88 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 5 Bi-directional OTDRPerforming a bi-directional measurement

A blue banner is displayed in the center of the screen where operation messages are displayed.

The icon for keeping all events in memory is displayed in this zone if the key Lock Evt/Free Evts is set on Lock Evt. In this case, the following measurement is performed using those markers (see «Memorization of the position of events» page 76)

3 Measurement status zone :

When a bi-directional measurement has been launched, all the different steps in the measurement process are presented in this zone. Each one is detailed later in this chapter.

NOTEThis function keeps markers in memory for both local trace and dis-tance trace.

NOTEThe general information banner is displayed at the top of the screen as for all other tabs. When a OEO measurement is performed, Data

and Remote mode icons are displayed as soon as a data connection is established.

User Manual 780000102/12 89

Chapter 5 Bi-directional OTDRPerforming a bi-directional measurement

Fiber link check To ensure that the two units are connected to the same fiber under test, select Check same fiber. If the fiber is the same at both extremities, a

symbol will be displayed on the measurement status zone.

Measurement process

Fiber measurementStep 1.– Choose to use the markers stored in memory or not by selecting

Lock Evt or Free Evts.

– Press START to begin the measurement.

The line Verify if same set up on both units becomes In progress… .

Fig. 34 Process page display

Data connection status

Measurement status zone

User guide zone

Information zone

Fiber connection status

Information concerning local unit

Information concerning remote unit

Identifier of the origin or end of the fiber according to the direction OE or EO

NOTEIf the markers events are already defined for the link, you may select the Lock Evt key. This implies that the unit will now perform measure-ments with those markers. Otherwise select Free Evts.

90 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 5 Bi-directional OTDRPerforming a bi-directional measurement

The begin launch cable is transferred to the end launch cable, and the end launch cable is transferred to the begin launch cable. The master Base Unit must indeed know both extremities of the fiber and will send the information to the slave Base Unit. The direction of the link is defined by the master Base Unit, which transmits the opposite direction to the slave Base Unit.

In the File configuration, each Base Unit points to its own directory. Only the master Base Unit may save a measurement. <Auto storage> and <File type> parameters only concern the master unit and are not com-pared or transferred to the slave Base Unit.

The list of lasers for which a measurement will be performed is set by the master Base Unit. If these lasters are not all available on the slave Base Unit, the list shall be restricted to the ones that are available.

When both menus SETUP and FILE are identical, the validation symbol is displayed and the process goes to Step 2.

Step 2The line <Check if same fiber for both units> becomes <In progress…>. If the master Base Unit successfully detects the other Base Unit at the extremity of the fiber under test, the validation symbol is displayed, and the process proceeds to Step 3. Otherwise, the red cross is dis-played and the measurement is stopped.Step 3The master Base Unit performs the acquisition using the first wave-length in the list. The message <In progress…> is displayed on each Base Unit, either in the «Local» column or the «Remote» column, depending on which Base Unit is considered. When the measurement is terminated, the message <Completed> is displayed. The trace is trans-ferred to the other Base Unit.Step 4The slave Base Unit performs the acquisition using the same wave-length. The message <In progress…> is displayed on each Base Unit, either in the «Local» column or the «Remote» column, according to which Base Unit is considered. The message <Completed> is displayed when the measurement is terminated,. The trace is transferred to the master Base Unit.

NOTEA warning may occur if the configurations of the two units are different (see «Warning/errors resulting from checking common configurations» page 99).

User Manual 780000102/12 91

Chapter 5 Bi-directional OTDRPerforming a bi-directional measurement

Step 5The bi-directional measurement is completed.

Step 6Step 3, Step 4 and Step 5 are performed for each wavelength to test.

IMPORTANT

It is possible to stop the measurement at any step of the process, by pressing the button START/STOP on the master Base Unit.

It is also possible to request from the slave Base Unit that the measure-ment is stopped, by pressing the button START/STOP. The master unit receives the request via a message on the screen: <Remote asks for stop, do you agree ?>. If Yes, the measurement is stopped, if No, the measure-ment resumes.

NOTEThe message <Impossible measurement> is displayed if the measure-ment has not been able to detect the end of the fiber on any of the two traces. The measurement must be performed once more with new acquisition parameters or by placing markers manually on the mea-surement.

92 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 5 Bi-directional OTDRTrace display functions

Trace display functions

By selecting the Curves, with the Process / Curves / Summary key, the unit displays the traces and results like in classical OTDR mode, adding bi-directional measurement results.

In the Curve page, the multi-choice key 1 allows to visualize successively the local trace, the remote trace, or both superposed.

Fig. 35 Butterfly representation of the bi-directional measurement

1.In our example, St-Etienne corresponds to the extremity connected to the local unit, Lyon corresponds to the extremity connected to the remote unit.

Selection :– Local– Remote– Bi-Directional

NOTEThe remote trace is reversed in order to superpose both traces in a «butterfly fashion» (see «Butterfly representation of the bi-directional measurement» page 93).

User Manual 780000102/12 93

Chapter 5 Bi-directional OTDRTrace display functions

Select the Summary function using the See Process/Curves/Summary key, to visualize the results in a sumary, with the Total Loss & Total ORL for each wavelength.

An additional table can be displayed under the summary, with issue high-lighted, in case of problem.

Origin and End traces

Bi-directional measurement may be performed using up to 4 different wavelengths. We can therefore analyze successively up to 4 couples of Origin and End traces.

NOTEYou may only use this key to change page when the measurement is completed. When the measurement is completed, the Curve page corresponding to the local Base Unit is automatically displayed (Ori-gin if the direction of the link has been defined O->E, End if the direc-tion of the link has been defined E->O).

Fig. 36 Summary display with OEO traces

Fig. 37 Warning on the OEO results

94 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 5 Bi-directional OTDROEO Result table

In order to go from one couple to another, activate the Wavelength/Evt key, select Wavelength, and move from one trace to another using arrows.

These traces are OTDR traces. All regular OTDR functions are proposed to modify the display (Zoom/Shift, Cursors, Evt, Curve/Table, Full scale,…).

Just like in OTDR mode, the user will be able to work on these traces in order to analyze the fiber : by moving events, consulting the selected trace associated result table, asking for an auto-measurement, adding markers, and doing manual measurements. See «Events» page 62, «Table of results» page 63, «Automatic measurement and detection» page 69, «Addition of markers» page 70 and «Manual measurements» page 71.

OEO trace Only one couple of OE and EO traces is displayed, corresponding to one wavelength.

If the measurement has been performed on different wavelengths, select Wavelength on the key Wavelength/Evt in order to go from one couple of traces to another, using arrows.

Functions such as Zoom/Shift, Cursors, Evt, Curve/Table, Full scale… are all the same as for OTDR but the table result as well as the use of markers are specific to OEO measurements.

OEO Result tableBi-directional measurement results use principles described in «Principle of bi-directional measurement» page 4.

The total loss of the fiber (on the line specifying the total number of events) is resulting from the average between the total loss calculated in the direction O->E and the total loss calculated in the other direction.

When the user comes back to OEO trace, all modifications that can have been done on either the Origin curve or on the End curve are now taken in account. The OEO measurement is performed again.

User Manual 780000102/12 95

Chapter 5 Bi-directional OTDRAutomatic measurement and Addition of markers in OEO page

Three tables are available in the OEO curve page, each showing atten-uation, slope and reflectance. In order to go from one table to another, use the Advanced key followed by the Atten./Slope/Réflect. key and select one of the three possibilities.

Automatic measurement and Addition of markers in OEO page

Key <Del Res/Auto Meas> :

When this key is activated in the EOE page, and Del Res> is selected, OEO measurement is erased as well as OTDR measurement, for both origin and end traces.

When Auto Meas is selected, auto-measurement is performed once more for both origin and end traces, resulting in a new OEO measure-ment.

Addition of markers

In order to modify a marker on any of both origin and end traces, select cursor A or B, position your cursor when you want to modify or add a marker and press the key Set Event:

– If there was no marker at this position, a new one is added on both origin and end traces

– If there was two markers, one on each of both origin and end traces, both are deleted

– If there was only one marker, either on the origin trace or on the end trace, a second marker is added, on the trace when none was present.

Markers display Markers are available on the trace taken from the origin.

Markers are available on the trace taken from the end.

NOTEAcquisitions must be done with the same resolution. If not, the addi-tion of markers can not be performed perfectly.

96 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 5 Bi-directional OTDRFile management

File management

Storing OEO measurements

At the end of a bi-directional measurement, the user has the possibility to save the origin trace as well as the end trace for each wavelength :

– either in a single «.OEO» file, – or in two different «.SOR» files.

Traces may be stored manually or automatically on the master unit. They can be stored manually on the slave unit.

If you had entered Auto Store, then the results will be saved automati-cally.

If not, click on FILE to access the OTDR File menu and select the right format. Then, press the Store Trace key.

Recalling OEO traces

Recalling a «.OEO» file: If the OEO software option is available, loading a «.OEO» file with the Load key followed by View Trace key will open automatically the OEO-OTDR tab in order to display the OEO trace.

Recalling two «.SOR» files:Wether the OEO software option is available or not, if the two «.SOR» files corresponding to a bi-directional measurement are selected, the key Load Bi-dir. appears. The OEO trace is then displayed.

For further information on File management, see Chapter 14 “File management on page 241’

NOTEIf both traces are not compatible (not performed using the same wavelength and pulse width), a error message is displayed <Acquisi-tion parameters for these two files are different ! >

User Manual 780000102/12 97

Chapter 5 Bi-directional OTDRTest of a cable

Test of a cableIn order to test a full cable, it is first necessary to make a OEO reference trace, where all fiber events have been marked on both origin and end traces. This trace may be obtained by requesting an auto-measurement after which markers may be added, or by performing a manual measure-ment.

The next step consists in memorizing all markers, by selecting Lock Evts in the Process page.

Finally, a bi-directional automatic measurement is performed for each fiber. Results are stored in either one «.OEO» file or two «.SOR» files.

Troubleshooting

Warning/errors after pressing

the key START

NOTEIf the auto mode was set for the referencing, it is recommended to change to manual mode for the next fibers. This will ensure that setup parameters used for all the fibers will be the same than those used for the reference trace.

Error message Possible problem Possible solution

No data link. Acti-vate connection before START

No data connec-tion

Go back to System page to establish a connection

No tab OEO-OTDR on remote 8000 Unit

No software option OEO-OTDR on remote Base Unit

Bi-directional mea-surement impossible if no software option on remote Base Unit

Remote 8000 Unit not ready

OTDR resource has not been selected

Go back to the Sys-tem page on the remote 8000 Unit to select the OTDR func-tion

98 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 5 Bi-directional OTDRTroubleshooting

Warning/errors resulting from

checking common

configurations

No resource for remote 8000 Unit

OTDR resource is already being used

Stop measurement on remote 8000 Unit to free the resource

No response from remote 8000 Unitt

Data link problem Check the data con-nection

Error message Possible problem Possible solution

Message Action possible

No common laser: acquisi-tion is impossible

Select a Base Unit equiped with the same type OTDR plug-in

Lasers are different. Do you want to continue?

Yes : measurement will occur using selected lasers common to both Base Units.No: measurement is stopped.

Acquisition configs are differ-ent. Transfer config to remote?

Yes : the SETUP configuration is transferred and applied on the remote Base Unit.No : no configuration transfer, the measurement is stopped.

File configs are different. Transfer config to remote?

Yes : the FILE configuration is transferred and applied to the remote Base Unit.No: no configuration transfer, the measurement is stopped.

Acquisition and files configs are different. Transfer config to remote?

Yes: The SETUP and FILE config-urations are transferred and applied on the remote Base Unit.No: no configuration transfer, the measurement is stopped

User Manual 780000102/12 99

Chapter 5 Bi-directional OTDRTroubleshooting

100 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 6 Optical Spectrum Measurement

6

This chapter describes the different stages in carrying out a spectrum analysis of an optical signal, or analyzing effects from an optical amplifier (EDFA type), by a Base Unit equipped with a 507XXX series module (and a 507Ext extension card) or with a 81WDM / 81WDMPMD module or with the OSA-XXX series.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

– “Configuration of the instrument” on page 102– “WDM / OSA test configuration” on page 102– “Acquisition” on page 113– “Trace display functions” on page 113– “Table of results” on page 117– “Channel filtering” on page 120– “EDFA results analysis” on page 1221

– “DFB results analysis” on page 124– “Testing ROADM networks” on page 126– “File Management” on page 128

The OSA-XXX are only available on MTS / T-BERD 8000 platform.

1.Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifier

User Manual 780000102/12 101

Chapter 6 Optical Spectrum MeasurementConfiguration of the instrument

Configuration of the instrumentAfter connecting the fiber to be tested to the optical connector, you must select the OSA module (see the Base Unit manual).

WDM / OSA test configurationTo configure the Base Unit in preparation for an OSA test on a fiber, press the SETUP button.

The various measurement parameters are proposed:

1 either choose the default values by pressing the <Test Auto> key.Configuration of acquisition in Test Auto mode:

– Sweep: Single– High Sensitivity: Auto– Averaging acquisition: No– Resolution: Full– Long term: No

Configuration of measurements in Test Auto mode:– Channel detection: Permanent– Signal threshold: Auto– OSNR

– OSNR method: Left and Right.– S <-> N distance: Auto– Noise acquisition bandwidth: 0.100 nm.

– Splitter compensation: –Value: No–Unit: dB

– Tilt & Slope Gain: NoConfiguration of the result screen in Test Auto mode:

– Grid: Default value = last value used– Alarms: No– Wavelength range: Auto– Table Notes: No– Unit: nm

102 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 6 Optical Spectrum MeasurementWDM / OSA test configuration

Configuration of the file set-up (see «File management» page 241)

– Filenaming : [Cable_id][Fiber_Num][Test_Point][Direction]– Auto Store : Yes– Nb Fiber Increment : Yes

2 or define your own configuration.

The parameter to be modified must be selected by means of the direction keys . The possible options then appear on the screen: make your choice using the direction keys and .

The various parameters proposed are defined below.

Acquisition Parameters

Fig. 38 Configuration screen for optical spectrum measurements

NOTEWith 507XXX series and 81XXX series modules, a warning message appears and the signal is cut off when the power of a channel is greater than 10 dBm or when the composite power of the input signal is greater than 20 dBm.

User Manual 780000102/12 103

Chapter 6 Optical Spectrum MeasurementWDM / OSA test configuration

Input portThis line only appears when the OSA 303 module is used.

The choices are:

– A: acquisition on port A– B: acquisition on port B– A+B : : acquisition on both ports

Acquisition band (only appears when 81WDMPMD module is used)– OESCL Acquisition will be performed on full band.– SCL Acquisition will only be performed on S, C and L bands.

Sweeps– ContinuousThere will be a measurement with refreshment of the

trace and real time display of the results: — every three seconds with plug-in 81WDM1.- every 1.5 seconds with modules OSA-16X/OSA-20X / OSA-30X/ OSA-50X- every 5 seconds with modules OSa-15x/OSA-18x/OSA-50x

— every 6 seconds with plug-in 81WDMPMD2

– Single There will be one single measurement and the display of its result.

– — Fast single measurement in I-OSNR mode, takes about 2 min.(only available for OSA-320)

– -Hi Sens single measurement with high sensitivity setting in I-OSNR mode, takes about 8 min.(only available for OSA-320)

NOTE: it is recommended to use Hi Sens mode for increased measure-ment accuracy.

– Statistics In this mode, the number of samples concerned by the statistics must be entered (next parameter). This is not applicable in I-OSNR mode for OSA-320.

– Filtering only appears when using some modules of the series OSA-16X/OSA-20X / OSA-30X / OSA-50X.

1.normal mode and 1.5 seconds in real time mode.2.normal mode and 3 seconds in real time mode.

104 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 6 Optical Spectrum MeasurementWDM / OSA test configuration

High Sensitivity Line not available on modules OSA-XXX.

– No The range of power extends from +15 to — 65 dBm.– Yes The range of power extends from — 25 to — 75 dBm.– Auto Automatic detection of the range of power

AveragingNo, Low, Medium, High

This function can reduce the noise level of a value up to 5 dB. When the acquisition is averaged, a bar graph showing the state of advancement of the averaging is displayed at the bottom right of the screen.

Resolution– Full maximum resolution of the filter (value depends on specifica-

tion of OSA-XXX module).– 0.1/0.2/0.3/0.4 or 0.5 nm for 507XXX series and 81XXX series plug-

ins.– 0.1/0.2/0.3/0.4/0.5, 1, 2 or 5 nm for modules OSA-XXX.

Number of sweepsIn Statistics mode, this must be selected between 2 and 1000.

Long Term

– No, – Manual the measurement is done manually, once the key Stop Wait

is pressed– Period the measurement is automatically done, after the wait period

selected (see hereunder).

Wait PeriodThe Wait Period parameter allows to enter a wait period before the measurement start (onlyactive if Long Term is positioned on <Period>)

NOTEA long term measurement can be done only if the Sweep parameter is on Statistic mode.

User Manual 780000102/12 105

Chapter 6 Optical Spectrum MeasurementWDM / OSA test configuration

– Increments of 5 seconds up to 1 minute, then increments of 1 minute up to 10 minutes, then increments of 5 minutes up to 60 minutes; then increment of 1 hour up to 24 hours.

Measurement parameters

Type– WDM Module is used to measure the optical spectrum of an

optical signal. Standard WDM results are displayed in the results table. (See «Display of the WDM / OSA results» page 113)

– EDFA Module is used to analyze results from an EDFA. EDFA results are displayed in the results table. (See «EDFA results analysis» page 122)

– DFB Module is used to analyze results from a DFB. DFB results are displayed in the results table (See «DFB results analysis» page 124)

– — I-OSNR Mode is used to measure the in-band OSNR in ROADM based networks (only available for OSA-320). See Testing ROADM networks on page xxx.

Channel Selection1

– Grid The grid serves as a detection reference: it must therefore be Regular, Manual, ITU DWDM or ITU CWDM.. The choice of grid takes priority over the choice Channel Selection. For example, it is not possible to choose Channel selection = Grid, if the option selected for the grid is «Without» or «Conventional».

– PermanentAutomatic detection of the channel on each acquisition. In this mode the channels are always detected without making a reference measurement.

Those parameters are only linked to the current active fiber.

1.Attention: all modification of these parameters has immediate repercussions on the trace and entails the loss of the measurement statistics.

106 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 6 Optical Spectrum MeasurementWDM / OSA test configuration

Signal threshold 1

Threshold of detection of channels (see «Channel detection threshold» page 115).

– Auto. the threshold is determined automatically.– Manual from -79.9 to +10 dBm.

Use direction keys or Edit Number to modify values (Min=80 dBm / Max=10.0 dBm)

Channel bandwidth (only available in OSA-xxx)Defines measurement bandwidth for high data rates to accurately measure the total channel power

Note: please select the following settings for channel badwidth

– 50 GHz for systems with data rates up to 12.5Gbps– 100 GHz for systems with data rates of 40/43Gbps– 200 GHz for systems with data rates of 100Gbps

For ultra DWDM systems with channel spaciong <<50GHz set channel bandwidth = channel spacing (e.g. set 25GHz for channel spacing of 25GHz)

SNR parametersTo modify these parameters, go to the OSNR line. A sub-menu then appears proposing the following options:

– WDM mode settings

– SNR method 1 Side of the peak where the point of reference for noise is taken (left, right, average left and right).

NOTEAt the end of an acquisition in permanent mode, it is possible to cre-ate a grid on the basis of the channels detected. To do this, press the key Create Grid in the SETUP menu.

NOTEModification of the parameters Channel selection and Signal threshold will only modify the results if the WDM module present is the one that was used for the acquisition.

User Manual 780000102/12 107

Chapter 6 Optical Spectrum MeasurementWDM / OSA test configuration

– S<->N distance1 Distance between the peak of the channel and the point of reference for the noise.

— Auto: distance determined according to the spacing of the chan-nels.- Manual: enter a value: 0.2/ 0.4/0.8 nm from the peak if the unit is nm or 25 GHz, 50 GHz,100 GHz from the peak if the unit is THz.

– I-OSNR mode settings (only available for OSA-320 in I-OSNR mode)

– OSNR method Auto evaluation for mixed filter shaped ROADM networks

– Flat Top evaluation for flat top filter shaped ROADM networks

– Noise Acq. Bandwidth1 Reference bandwidth used for the acquisition of noise:

— standard 100 pm- values lie between 10 pm and 10 000 pm.

Splitter compensationWhen the measurement is made by the intermediary of a separator (also known as a splitter), it is possible to compensate for the loss introduced by this element and to display the value measured before or after it.

Go to the Splitter compensation line to display a sub-menu proposing the following options

– Value1 Yes: activation of compensation and choice of its value using the keys and : or the numeric keypad : from 1 to 30 dB (by increments of 1) or 1 to 99% (by increments of 0.1%).

– Unit Choice of compensation in dB or as a percentage of the value measured.

For example, with a 10 dB splitter, the results will be augmented by 10 dB. The trace will be offset upwards by 10 dB. A channel measured at -30 dB will be displayed -20 dB.

1.Attention: all modification of these parameters has immediate repercussions on the trace and entails the loss of the measurement statistics.

108 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 6 Optical Spectrum MeasurementWDM / OSA test configuration

Tilt & Slope Gain– No/Yes Validates measurement and display of the max.

difference in gain (in dB) and slope of the gain (in dB per nm or by THz) above the trace.

Parameters of display and

analysis of the results

Grid Go to the Grid line to access the Grid sub-menu. Select the Type line to see the different choices and modify them if required.

Five possible types of grid are proposed with different corresponding values, some of which are fixed or non-applicable, others editable.

The type «Conventional» and the option «Without» do not give access to the parameters of the Grid sub-menu; the others give access to certain options, as shown in the table of the figure.

Those parameters are valid for all traces present on the screen.

User Manual 780000102/12 109

Chapter 6 Optical Spectrum MeasurementWDM / OSA test configuration

Table 1 Grid menu options for each type of grid

ITU CWDM ITU DWDM Regular Manual

Grid name Editable Editable Editable Editable

ITU standard

G.694.2 G.692 N/A N/A

First ITU channel (with display in nm)

Editable, from 1270 to 1630 nm, by incre-ments of 20 nm

Editable, from 1528.77 to 1560.61 nm, by increments correspond-ing to the channel spac-ing selected

Editable from 1260 to 1650 nm, by incre-ments of 0.01 nm.

N/A

Channel spacing

20 nm Editable, from 25 to 200 GHz

Editable from 20 to 1000 GHz by increments of 1 at each click, of 10 if key is held down

N/A

Number of channels

Editable, from 1 to 19 by increments of 1

Editable, from 1 to 21 by increments of 1

Editable, from 1 to 56 by incre-ments of 1

Editable from 1 to 256

Define channels

Sub-menu accessible to display the wavelengths of each chan-nel, name the band, and name each channel

Sub-menu accessible to display the wavelengths of each chan-nel, name the band, and name each channel

Sub-menu accessible to display the wavelengths of each channel, name the band, and name each channel

Sub-menu accessible to display the wave-lengths of each chan-nel, name the band, and name each chan-nel

110 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 6 Optical Spectrum MeasurementWDM / OSA test configuration

AlarmsWhen Channel Selection is positioned on Grid, it is possible to activate an alarm system. This system is based on a system of thresholds. Any measurement results that exceed these thresholds are displayed in red in the table, and the icon appears at the top right of the screen. If all the results are within the thresholds (no result is in red), the icon becomes .

To activate the alarm system, go to the <Alarms> line and select «Active».

Thresholds can then be set (using the direction keys or numeric keypad), to global level or to the level of each channel:

1 <Global alarms>–Number of channels: Yes/No

–Max. variation level1: No or threshold modifiable from 0.1 to 60 dB

–Max. SNR variation2: No or threshold modifiable from 0.1 to 60 dB

–Max composite p. 3: No or threshold modifiable from -59.9 dBm to +20 dBm

2 <Channel alarms>

– Max channel offset4: Yes/No

– Min. Level (channel)5 Yes/No

– Max. Level (channel)6 Yes/No

NOTEThe maximum real number of channels for ITU grids depends on the value selected for the first channel and the spacing between the chan-nels.

NOTEIt is possible to display the grid with the <View Grid> key. A table then appears showing the channel number, the name of the channel, the reference wavelength and the alarm thresholds for delta F, min. P, max. P and min. SNR.

1.Max. acceptable variation between max. power and min. power on all channels2.Max. acceptable variation between max. SNR and min. SNR on all channels3.Maximum composite power4.Wavelength drift. Selection of the alarm on the basis of the value of delta F5.The values are then defined in Min. P

User Manual 780000102/12 111

Chapter 6 Optical Spectrum MeasurementWDM / OSA test configuration

– Min. SNR 1: Yes/No– Channel number: From «001» to the max. number of channels.– Value of channel: Display of the wavelength of the channel

number selected

– Delta F2: From 0 to 2 THz (2 THz is the default value)

– Min. P3: From -80 dBm to +9.9 dBm (below max. threshold)

– Max. P4: From -79.9 dBm to +10 dBm (above min. threshold)

– Min. SNR: From 0 to 50 dB

Wavelength rangeParameter to set the display wavelength range.

This parameter just sets the wavelength range to be displayed as a trace

– Mode Auto display automatically zooms into the the wavelength range where optical channels are present

– Full full wavelength range– C+L Band C+L band wavelength range– C Band C band wavelength range– Start/ End manually selectable start / end wavelengths– Center / Span manually selectable center /span.

Table NotesHere the display can be configured and it can be specified whether or not it is possible to enter a note for each channel (see»Table notes» page 119).

6.The values are then defined in Max. P1.The values are then defined in Min. SNR 2.Delta of frequency3.Minimum power 4.Maximum power

NOTEThe OSA-xx modules always perform a measurement scan over the full wavelength range.

112 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 6 Optical Spectrum MeasurementAcquisition

UnitsHere the units of the x axis can be selected:

– Frequency in THz – Wavelength in nm

AcquisitionTo start a measurement press START key. The OSA-XXX will scan over the entire wavelength range and the measurement result will be displayed in graphical and tabular format.

1 Fast acquisition (not available for OSA-xxx modules): press the START key and hold it down for some time.

2 Normal acquisition: press the START key briefly.

Only «Normal acquisition» mode operates with modules OSA-16X/OSA-20X / OSA-30X. When acquisition is complete, an automatic measure-ment is performed.

Trace display functionsThe trace acquired or recalled from a memory is displayed on the Results page: see example Figure 15 on page 32.

A range of functions enable modifications to the display of the trace (Cursors, Zoom/Shift, Event/Trace, Trace/Table, Full scale, etc.). See «Functions relating to display of a trace» page 37.

See «Overlaying several traces stored in memory» page 42 for overlay of traces.

Display of the WDM / OSA

results

The results window, obtained by pressing the RESULTS button, shows different zones displaying, from top to bottom:

– the mini-trace in the upper part of the screen, accompanied by the principal characteristics of the acquisition and of the file if the result is stored in memory.

User Manual 780000102/12 113

Chapter 6 Optical Spectrum MeasurementTrace display functions

– the trace results associated with cursors A and B– the trace proper (see «Trace display functions» page 113). – the table of results (see «Table of results» page 117).

The trace represents power (in dBm) as a function of frequency (in THz) or wavelength (in nm). The channels detected are represented by peaks.

Successive zooms on the different channels– Zoom on one of the channels as shown previously.– Press the Trace>/<Channel key– Use the and keys to move the zoom on to the successive

channels.

<Trace> /<Table> keyThis key offers a choice from the following displays:

– Trace alone:main display of the trace with a single line of the table at the foot of the page.

– Trace + Table:display of trace, reduced in size but followed by 5 to 8 lines of the table of results.

– Table: display of the table alone

NOTEIf several acquisitions are performed, the trace displayed is the one corresponding to the last acquisition.

114 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 6 Optical Spectrum MeasurementTrace display functions

Channel detection thresholdOn the trace, some peaks corresponding to noise could be mistaken for channels. It is therefore necessary to fix a power threshold level: only peaks that exceed this threshold will be considered as channels and included in the table of results.

To display or modify this threshold, press the SETUP key, then select Signal threshold. Modify the value to position it on Auto1 or fix a threshold value.

Display of a gridThe display window of the trace can include a grid to facilitate verification of the position of the channels. Several grids are possible (see the chapter «Parameters of display and analysis of the results» page 109)

Fig. 39 Example of OSA test result (with grid)

1.The «Auto» value is obtained by continuing to reduce the value of the threshold below the minimum value of -79.9 dBm

Mini-trace display

Resolution

Number of acquisitions

Name of moduleSignal threshold

Distance S to N File name

Direction

Alarm result

Wavelengths and power at point of trace referenced by cursors A and BWavelength and power difference between cursors A and B

Number of the channel

Channel

User Manual 780000102/12 115

Chapter 6 Optical Spectrum MeasurementTrace display functions

Display of total power between cursorsTo display on the trace the total power between the two cursors A and B:

– Place the cursors at the desired positions.– Press the Advanced key, then Total Power A<—>B.– The space between the trace and the two cursors is greyed out and

the power is displayed in the form «P=-4.95dBm».– Pressing the key T. A<—>B a second time removes the result of the

total power measurement.

Display of gain Tilt (delta) and gain slope results The Base Unit can display two additional results:

– The gain tilt, that is to say the difference between the max.and min. values of the peaks of the complete signal spectrum between the cursors.

– The gain slope measured by a method using a least squares algo-rithm.

To display these results above the channels:

– Confirm Delta Gain & Slope in the SETUP menu.– Place the cursors at the desired position.– Press the Advanced key, then Tilt/Slope A<->B.

The gain tilt is displayed in dB. Gain slope is traced and its value is displayed in dB/THz or dB/nm according to the units selected.

116 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 6 Optical Spectrum MeasurementTable of results

Table of results

LinesAccording to the choice made in the SETUP menu, the table of results may include:

– either a line for each channel detected (if Channel Selection = Permanent)

– or a line for each graduation, (if Channel Selection = Grid and a grid is selected)

Type of displayThe table may be displayed in a single line, on half of the screen or the whole screen as a function of the <Trace>/<Table> key (see «<Trace> /<Table> key» page 114)

Fig. 40 Display of total power, gain tilt and slope of the gain between the cursors

User Manual 780000102/12 117

Chapter 6 Optical Spectrum MeasurementTable of results

Contents of the table without statisticsIn the absence of statistics (see «Measurement parameters» page 106) the parameters given for each channel are:

1 the number of the channel

2 the frequency or the channel wavelength according to the units selected.

3 the interval between the channels in THz or in nm

4 the level of power of the channel in dBm

5 the noise level in dBm

6 the SNR for the channel in dB

7 the ratio between the power of the channel and the composite power in%.

8 in WDM mode:display of out-of-band OSNR value based on OSNR settings

9 in I-OSNR mode: (only available for OSA-320) display of in-band OSNR value, indicating the «true» OSNR in ROADM based networks

The contents of the last 5 columns of the table will be different if statistics are calculated. The values to which the statistics relate being frequency (or wavelength) and noise level or signal-to-noise ratio, the display will give current value, average value, max. value, min. value and standard deviation.

Contents of the table with statisticsIf the test includes multiple acquisitions (mode 2..100 or Continuous mode), statistics are calculated on the results. To display these results in the table, press the Table Contents key, then Statistics.

Five Statistics keys are then available to choose what will be displayed in the table for each channel.

NOTEStatistics is not available in I-OSNR mode for OSA-320.

118 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 6 Optical Spectrum MeasurementTable of results

Channel sortThe channels can be classified in the table in ascending order of frequency (or wavelength), level or SNR.

To modify this order:

– Press the Table Contents key, then Sort.– Press Freq Sort (or Wavel. Sort according to the units selected),

Level Sort or SNR Sort.

Successive addressing of channels according to the sort type selectedOn the trace and in the table, it is possible to move the cursor from one channel to the next in the selected sort order. To do this,:

– Use the key Cursor A>/<Cursor B to choose the cursor A or B to be used on the trace.

– Press the Channel key– Press and to move the cursor to the following or preceding

channel:

Table notesA note of not more than 40 characters, entered by the user, may be asso-ciated with each channel.

Without statist.

Channel Freq. or Wavel.

Interval Level Noise SNR P/ Comp.P

Statist. Freq. or Wavel.

Channel Freq. or Wavel.

Interval or Freq.ref or Wavel. ref

Av. F or Av. L

Max. F. or Max. L

Min. F or Min. L

Std. dev. F or Lorvalue delta

Statist. Power

Channel Freq. or Wavel.

Level Av. P Max. P Min. P Std. dev. P or value delta

Statist. SNR

Channel Freq. or Wavel.

SNR Av.SNR Max. SNR

Min. SNR

Std. dev. SNR or value delta

Statist. Mixed

Channel Freq. or Wavel.

Min. F or Min. L

Max. F. or Max. L

Level Min. P Max. P

NOTEEach note is associated with a channel. Consequently, if the channel is deleted, the note the will be deleted too.

User Manual 780000102/12 119

Chapter 6 Optical Spectrum MeasurementChannel filtering

To enter a note:

– In the table, select the channel.– Press the Table Contents key, then press Notes.– Enter the text of the note and confirm its creation. – Press the Exit key to return to the previous menu if necessary.

Displaying relative resultsBy default, the table gives the results in absolute values. To obtain these results in relative values with respect to a reference channel:

– Press the Table Contents key, then Relative>/<Absolute to select Relative.

– Move the cursor on to the channel that is to serve as the reference.– Press the Define Ref. Channel key. The results are recalculated

with respect to this channel of reference.

Channel filtering

Field of application

This option is only available for OSA-XX1 and OSA-XX3 modules.

It is used to filter out one particular channel and extract it via a port called the «drop port».

NOTEThese notes appear in the table only if they have been validated in the SETUP menu on the Table notes line (Result screen). Similarly, this option must be confirmed in order to be able to create a note.

NOTEThe table notes are not stored in the measurement results.

NOTEOn quitting this menu, the table automatically reverts to the display of absolute values.

120 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 6 Optical Spectrum MeasurementChannel filtering

Configuration To obtain filtering of a given canal to the drop port, go into theSETUP menu of the OSA module. Choose Acquisition, then Sweeps and select Filtering.

The options of the acquisition menu then change and offer:

Choice of channelIn the Choice of Channel option, either a value may be entered manually or the current value from the table can be taken.

– Manual: A new line appears above choice of channel, in which the required value can be entered.

– Table: The value of the current selection in the results table is used automatically. To vary this selection, go the the result screen and use Table contents.

Channel valueHere the manual value of the filtering to be performed can be entered using the direction keys and . or the numeric keypad

TrackingActivating the tracking function will make the internal tunable filter follow slow wavelength changes of optical sources and transmitters providing stable output power.

The information «Locked» appears as long as the channel remains within the tolerance limits of the instrument. If the channel strays outside the tolerance band, the information «Unlocked» appears.

Using channel filtering

After setting sweep mode (in the acquisition menu of the SETUP screen) on Filtering, press the START/STOP button to start or stop filtering of the signal.

NOTEFor Dual Port OSA-210 and OSA-303 only the input port B can extract a channel to the drop port.

User Manual 780000102/12 121

Chapter 6 Optical Spectrum MeasurementEDFA results analysis

EDFA results analysisThe results analysis of an EDFA consists in performing two spectrum analysis: one before the signal is amplified and another one after the signal is amplified. Both traces are further compared, providing the resulting power gain and noise figure.

EDFA test configuration

To configure the Base Unit in preparation for an EDFA test, press the SETUP button.

In the Measurements section, set Type on «EDFA».

Other SETUP parameters are the same for EDFA as for WDM measure-ments. Refer to «WDM / OSA test configuration» page 102 for a complete description.

EDFA measurements

Measurement procedure, using one port :If only one port is selected, the Base Unit is ready to perform the «Acq. in» (signal before being amplified by EDFA).

– Connect your Base Unit to your fiber before the EDFA. – Click START/STOP to perform the first acquisition.– Switch to Acq. Out. – Connect your Base Unit to your fiber after the EDFA. – Click START/STOP to perform the second acquisition.

Results appear automatically in the table.

NOTEIf your Base Unit is equipped with an OSA201, you may use the two ports to test before and after the EDFA. In this case, make sure you select «Port A+B» for Input Port.

122 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 6 Optical Spectrum MeasurementEDFA results analysis

Measurement procedure, using two ports :If two ports are selected, the Base Unit will perform both «Acq. In» and «Acq. Out» in one step.

– Connect your Base Unit to your fiber before the EDFA on port A and your fiber after the EDFA on port B.

– Click START/STOP to perform both acquisitions.

Results appear automatically in the table.

EDFA results A table is displayed (see «EDFA measurements» page 123) showing for each channel:

– S. In:Signal power before EDFA (expressed in dBm)– N. In:Noise level before EDFA (expressed in dBm)– S. Out:Signal power after EDFA (expressed in dBm)– N. Out:Noise level after EDFA (expressed in dBm)– Gain:Power gain from EDFA (expressed in dB)– NF:Noise figure from EDFA (expressed in dB)

<Channel> allows to move the cursor from one channel to another, both in the trace and in the table of results.

Fig. 41 EDFA measurements

Select which trace to view Select which acquisition you are working on

User Manual 780000102/12 123

Chapter 6 Optical Spectrum MeasurementDFB results analysis

Saving EDFA resultsResults are not saved in a file. Nevertheless, both traces may be stored as regular WDM traces.

To save your files:

– Select Acq. In to save the first file– Click on FILE, select name and Store Trace– Click on RESULTS to come back to the previous screen– Proceed the same way for Acq. Out.

Loading EDFA resultsResults are not saved in a file. Nevertheless, both traces may be reloaded as regular WDM traces. Results will be automatically recalcu-lated.

– Select Acq. In before loading your first file– Click on FILE and Explorer to select your file– Load and view your trace

The first trace is now loaded for <Acq. In>. – Select Acq. Out before loading the second file and proceed the

same way to load the second file.

Results appear automatically in the table.

DFB results analysisThis feature only applies to OSA-XXX modules.

DFB results analysis allows to characterize DFB lasers, by giving the corresponding SMSR, Offset and bandwidth values (see the measure-ment principles in «DFB analysis» page 6).

DFB test configuration

To configure the Base Unit in preparation for an DFB test, press the setup button.

In the Measurements section, set Type on DFB.

124 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 6 Optical Spectrum MeasurementDFB results analysis

A new DFB sub-menu is offered while other Setup parameters are the same for DFB as for WDM measurements. Refer to «WDM / OSA test configuration» page 102 for a complete description.

DFB (sub-menu)– Bandwidth level Level (expressed in dBc) where the main

component bandwidth should be calculated– Min SMSR Minimum offset value to consider to find the Side

Mode– Max SMSR Maximum offset value to consider to find the Side

Mode

DFB measurements

Measurement procedure:– Use a patchcord to connect your DFB laser source to an input port

of the OSA-XXX module on the Base Unit.– Power on the DFB laser source.– Click START/STOP to perform the acquisition.

The trace and corresponding results appear automatically after a few seconds.

Cursors A and B are automatically positioned on the first DFB laser, respectively on the max SMSR and the pick of the main component.

Fig. 42 DFB measurements

Select which DFB you are working on

User Manual 780000102/12 125

Chapter 6 Optical Spectrum MeasurementTesting ROADM networks

DFB results A table is displayed (see «DFB measurements» page 125) showing for each DFB:

– Channel: Number of DFB laser detected– Wavelen: Wavelength (expressed in nm) of the DFB main

component– Level: Peak amplitude (expressed in dBm)– SMSR: Side Mode Suppression Ratio (expressed in dBc)– Mode off: Mode Offset (expressed in nm)– BW @ level:Calculated bandwidth (expressed in nm) according to

the bandwidth level (expressed in dBc) defined in the setup menu.

When the <Channel> key is selected, use the arrow keys and to move the cursor from one DFB pick to another1, both in the trace and in the table of results.

Saving DFB resultsDFB Results are not saved in a file. Nevertheless, the trace may be stored as a regular WDM trace.

To save your files:

– Click on FILE, select name and Store Trace– Click on RESULTS to come back to the previous screen

Loading DFB resultsResults are not saved in a file. Nevertheless, the trace may be reloaded as a regular WDM trace. Make sure Type> is set on DFB in the setup menu to recalculate DFB results.

Results appear automatically in the table.

Testing ROADM networksIn ROADM networks, each channel may traverse different routes, optical amplifiers, and add-drop filters, resulting in different OSNR for each channel. Conventional OSA measurements are unreliable, as they indi-

1.In case several DFB lasers are characterized at the same time

126 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 6 Optical Spectrum MeasurementTesting ROADM networks

cate OSNR values that are too high: up to 10dB above the true OSNR. Using the in-band OSNR method (I-OSNR) of OSA-320 will provide the true OSNR value in ROADM based networks.

With OSA-320 it is possible to measure the «true» in-band OSNR using the polarization splitting technique.

Here is a test setup for in-band OSNR testing

How to locate the failure?Perform the following tests at EDFA monitor access points (2-5):

– Check per channel input and output power of EDFA

Fig. 43 ROADM network test

Fig. 44 Test setup for In-band OSNR testing

Example:– OSNR measured with in-band OSA-320 at terminal site (1) provides

value of 14dB– Service failed as the OSNR is < 20 dB

User Manual 780000102/12 127

Chapter 6 Optical Spectrum MeasurementFile Management

=> input power must be in the system specified range– Check power uniformity

=> Equal power levels for all channels at EDFA output– Compare OSNR from EDFA to EDFA

=> OSNR may only drop by the amplifier noise figure NF (type 3-4 dB) per EDFA

– Locate and exchange optical amplifier

File Management

Storing OSA measurements

If Auto store has been selected, then results will be saved automatically. If not, or if you want to save the results under another name, directory etc.:

1 Click on FILE key

2 Select Setup with the Setup/Explorer key

3 Modify the parameters you want

4 Click on Store TraceThe trace is saved with the extension «.OSA»

Recalling OSA files

Once an OSA file has been stored, recall it using the Explorer:

1 Select Explorer with the key Setup/Explorer.

2 Using directions keys, select the directory and then the file to open

3 Click on Load

4 Click on View Tace(s) or Load Trace + Config.The selected file is opened

For further informations on file management, see Chapter 14 “File management”.

128 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 7 Polarization Mode Dispersion Measurement

7

This chapter describes the different steps in carrying out a PMD measurement with a Base Unit equipped with a 5073PMD or 5073WDMPA plug-in (and with a 507XExt extension card), with a 81PMD / 81WDMPMD module or with the OSA-16X / OSA-20X / OSA-30X series1 or an ODM Module.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

– «Recommended equipment» on page 130– «PMD test setup menu» on page 130– «Performing a PMD measurement with a 5073XXX plug-in or OSA-

16X / OSA-20X / OSA-30X series module» on page 134– «Performing a PMD measurement with a 81XXX plug-in» on

page 139– «Display of results» on page 140– «Statistics results» on page 142– “File Management” on page 145– «PMD standards and limits» on page 145

It is assumed that you are familiar with the operation of the Base Unit, the OBS-55 (Optical Broadband Source) and the OVP-15 (Optical Variable Polarizer) options.

1.Equipped with PMD test kit option

User Manual 780000102/12 129

Chapter 7 Polarization Mode Dispersion MeasurementRecommended equipment

Recommended equipmentTo perform a PMD measurement, the following equipment is recom-mended:

– Base Unit with a module or plug-in as mentioned above, and associ-ated optical connectors.

– OVP-15 Optical Variable Polarizer ± 90° with associated optical connectors, for 5073XXX plug-ins and OSA-16X / OSA-20X / OSA-30X series modules1.

– OBS-55 Optical Broadband Source, output power level 0 dBm with associated optical connectors, or E81BBS2A optical Broadband Sources.

– Visual Fault Locator (VFL) with associated optical connector. – Fiber scope with associated optical connectors.– Cleaning kit.– Two jumpers with associated optical connectors.– One coupler.– Communication tool (either GSM or telephone, or optical talk set).

PMD test setup menuAfter connecting the fiber to be tested and all the equipment is switched on and ready for use, you will then need to set up the Base Unit to perform a PMD measurement.

To access the PMD test setup menu, press the SETUP button on the Base Unit. The different measurement parameters are displayed.

1.81XXX plug-ins offer an integrated polarizer, therefore don’t require an OVP-15.

NOTEA description and methods used to measure the Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD) is described in «PMD principle» on page 7.

NOTEThe PMD value obtained by the fixe analyzer method is the mean PMD value, also designated as «expected PMD value».

130 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 7 Polarization Mode Dispersion MeasurementPMD test setup menu

You may:

– either choose the default values by pressing the Test Auto key.– either define your own configuration.

Test Auto Configuration

In Test Auto configuration, the setups below are provided.

Setup menuACQUISITION

– Sweep : Single– Averaging acquisition: Auto– Make reference : No1

– Reference date– Long term: No

MEASURES

– Coupling : Strong

File Menu– Filenaming: Auto : [Cable_Id][Fiber_Num][Direction]– Autostore: Yes– Fiber Nbr Increment: Yes

Manual Mode Configuration

In manual mode, you can set your own parameters.

1.Does not concern 81XXX plug-ins.

Fig. 45 PMD Test setup menu

User Manual 780000102/12 131

Chapter 7 Polarization Mode Dispersion MeasurementPMD test setup menu

Acquisition parameters

Acquisition band (only appears when 81WDMPMD module is used)OESCL Acquisition will be performed on the full band. SCL Acquisition will only be performed on S, C and L bands.

ModeContinue There is a continuous measurement with a trace refresh

and a real-time display of the results.Single There will only be one measurement and display of the

result.Statistics A set of measurements can be performed providing

statistics or results. This mode also gives access to the two following parameters (Wait period and Number of samples).

Averaging acquisition (to improve the dynamic range of the unit)

No No average of the acquisition sample to be performed.Low Low averaging (4 samples).Medium Medium averaging (16 samples).High High averaging (32 samples).Auto The average low, medium or high measurement is

automatically selected during the reference.

Number of sweepsNumber of acquisitions from 2 to 100.

Long termWait period between two consecutive samples, in statistics mode:

NOTEWhen the composite power of the input signal is higher than 20 dBm, a warning is displayed and the signal is cut off.

NOTEAn increase of the averaging can improve the dynamic range to up to 5 dB.

132 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 7 Polarization Mode Dispersion MeasurementPMD test setup menu

None samples are displayed one after the other;Manual: requires the user to press the Stop Wait button to start

the next sample. This mode is used for example, if you wish to set the polarizer value between each acquisition.

Period: A new line Wait becomes available when Yes is selected.

Wait PeriodThe Wait Period parameter allows to enter a wait period before the measurement start (onlyactive if Long Term is positioned on Period)

– Increments of 5 seconds up to 1 minute, then increments of 1 minute up to 10 minutes, then increments of 5 minutes up to 60 minutes; then increment of 1 hour up to 24 hours.

Measurementparameters

Fiber length (Edit Number: Min=0.100 km / Max=20000 km)

The fiber length must be set to provide the PMD coefficient.

Distance UnitKm Distance unit defined in kilometers.Kfeet Distance unit defined in kilofeet.Miles Distance unit defined in miles.

CouplingStrong For classical, long single-mode fibersWeak For polarization-maintained fibers and components. A

weak coupling includes three peaks for a Fast Fourier Transform Method (FFT).

If the softkey PMD is set to Standard mode, any measurement will be set to the strong mode Coupling and the wavelength range to Auto.

The Expert mode is to be used with measurement through EDFA. When selected, the Expert mode allows to set the wavelength range:

— Measurement Band: Auto / C Band / L Band / C+L Band / Manual When Manual is selected, the Measurement Start and End must be set (in nm).

In manual mode, the user will have to define the starting value of measurement and the ending value (in nm).

User Manual 780000102/12 133

Chapter 7 Polarization Mode Dispersion MeasurementPerforming a PMD measurement with a 5073XXX plug-in or OSA-16X / OSA-20X / OSA-30X series

Results Screen parameters

AlarmsNone None selected. Selecting this option removes access to

the Auto Values and Bit rate info. options (they will disappear from the screen).

Active To include any survey alarms. The following fields are then enabled.

Auto ValuesNo Threshold values are entered manually.Yes Threshold values are automatically calculated and

adjusted in accordance with the selected information from the Bit rate info. table. This option gives access to the lines PMD Delay and PMD Coeff.

Bit rate info.A table to the right of this option appears when the Bit rate info. is selected. This table lists the available PMD standards that can be used. To make a choice, use the direction arrow keys and . For further information about PMD standards, refer to the table on page 145.

PMD Delay Maximum delay before an alarm signal.PMD Coeff. Maximum PMD coefficient before an alarm signal.PMD2 Delay Maximum second order PMD delay before an alarm

signal. (Only appears if Coupling is set on StrongPMD2 Coeff. Maximum second order PMD coefficient before an alarm

signal.

Delay and coefficient values for PMD and PMD2 can be modified with the directions keys or using the Edit Number key.

Parameters available in the File Menu are identical to those for other file types (see «File configuration menu» on page 242).

Performing a PMD measurement with a 5073XXX plug-in or OSA-16X / OSA-20X / OSA-30X series module

It is recommended before performing a PMD measurement, at least once a day, to carry out a reference measurement of the broadband source. The fiber under test is connected to the OBS-55, or E81BBS2A and Base Unit by test cables.

134 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 7 Polarization Mode Dispersion MeasurementPerforming a PMD measurement with a 5073XXX plug-in or OSA-16X / OSA-20X / OSA-30X series

On the measurement examples below, only the OBS-55 will be described. But it can easily be replaced by the E81BBS2A.

Performing the reference

To do this, use the following process:

Remote operator 1 Remove the protection cap on the OBS-55 and then connect the connector to the fiber link under test.

2 Press the ON/OFF button to switch on the OBS-55 broadband source. Keep pressure on the ON/OFF button until the > 2s PERM LED lights up.The CW LED lights up while the green 1550 nm LED will flash for a few seconds before being steadily lighted.

Local operator 1 Remove the dust cap from the Signal Input optical socket situated on the rear panel of the Base Unit to connect the fiber link you have connected to the OBS-55 via the two jumpers and coupler as shown in the below diagram.

Fig. 46 Reference measurement

Fiber under test

Coupler

JumpersJumper

OBS-55 (example)

Signal input socket situated on the ODM module

User Manual 780000102/12 135

Chapter 7 Polarization Mode Dispersion MeasurementPerforming a PMD measurement with a 5073XXX plug-in or OSA-16X / OSA-20X / OSA-30X series

2 Select the PMD function in the Instrument Setup menu. To do this, press the SETUP button, then select the PMD function, and press the key .

3 Press the button RESULTS to display the auto-calibration status. A bargraph informs of the progression state of the calibration at the bottom of the screen. Wait for the calibration to be fully completed before continuing.

4 Press the button SETUP to access to the Base Unit configuration menu for PMD. Use the keys and . to move the cursor to the different parameters and the keys and to modify a value.

5 Check that the option Make Reference is set to Yes in the configu-ration menu.

6 Press the button START/STOP to start the reference of the broad-band source. To display the results, press the button RESULTS. Once the reference is correct, PMD measurement may take place.

Fig. 47 Selection of the PMD function (8000 series example)

NOTEWhen a reference is performed, acquisition parameters are not taken in account, except for those concerning averaging.

136 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 7 Polarization Mode Dispersion MeasurementPerforming a PMD measurement with a 5073XXX plug-in or OSA-16X / OSA-20X / OSA-30X series

A bargraph shows if the source power level will allow to perform PMD measurements correctly.Weak Strong

If the reference measurement does not provide a correct result, check the following points:

Fig. 48 Example of a correct reference for a broadband source

Error message Possible problem Possible solution

Acquisition impossibleHit any key to continue

Auto-calibration is not completed

Wait for the calibration to be terminated

Signal level too low !Check source and con-nectionsHit any key to continue

The OBS-55 is not switched on

Press the ON/OFF button to switch on the OBS-55, verify if Make reference is still set to Yes, then repeat step 6

The OBS-55 battery is too low

Check if the LOW-BATT red led is lighted. If yes, then recharge the battery.

Defective connections Check that the cables are properly connected, and the notches on the connectors are correctly aligned.

User Manual 780000102/12 137

Chapter 7 Polarization Mode Dispersion MeasurementPerforming a PMD measurement with a 5073XXX plug-in or OSA-16X / OSA-20X / OSA-30X series

Performing the measurement

When the reference measurement of the broadband source has been completed, the polarizer replaces the coupler.

Use the following procedure to make a measurement:

1 Remove the two protection caps on the OVP-15.

2 Disconnect the coupler and connect the cables to the OVP-15. Either connector on the OVP-15 can be used.

3 Set the OVP-15 polarization angle to 0º (any polarization angle would be acceptable, however it is preferable not to change it).

4 Press the SETUP button to access the Base Unit configuration menus.

5 Select the appropriate PMD test setup according to your application as earlier defined in this chapter.

6 Press the START/STOP button to see the results within a few seconds.

7 Repeat the PMD measurement for every fiber to be tested (it will have to be connected to the OBS-55).

Fig. 49 PMD measurement with an external polarizer

Fiber under test

JumperJumperOBS-55

OVP-15

Signal input socket on the ODM plug-in

POLARIZATION ANGLE

0o

+90o-90o

λ = 1260…1600 nm

Optical Variable Polarizer OVP-15

…

138 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 7 Polarization Mode Dispersion MeasurementPerforming a PMD measurement with a 81XXX plug-in

Performing a PMD measurement with a 81XXX plug-in The 81XXX plug-in is equiped with an internal polarizer which is automat-ically switched on and off during referencing. The reference is therefore done automatically by the Base Unit.

Remote operator

1 Remove the protection cap on the OBS-55 and then connect the connector to the fiber link under test.

2 Press the ON/OFF button to switch on the OBS-15 broadband source. Keep pressure on the ON/OFF button until the «> 2s PERM» LED lights up.The CW LED lights up while the green «1550 nm» LED will flash for a few seconds before being steadily lighted.

Local operator 1 Remove the dust cap from the Signal Input optical socket situated on the rear panel of the Base Unit to connect the fiber link you have connected to the OBS-55 as shown in the below diagram.

2 Select the PMD function in the Instrument Setup menu.

3 Press the SETUP button to access the Base Unit configuration menus.

4 Select the appropriate PMD test setup according to your application as earlier defined in this chapter.

5 Press the START/STOP button to see the results within a few seconds.

6 Repeat the PMD measurement for every fiber to be tested (it will have to be connected to the OBS-55).

User Manual 780000102/12 139

Chapter 7 Polarization Mode Dispersion MeasurementDisplay of results

Display of results

Spectrum/FFT menu key

The key Spectrum / FFT enables you to display:

– either the spectrum representing the power (in dBm) according to the frequency (in THz or wavelength in nm according to setup configuration).

– or the FFT curve and PMD information (delay & coefficient) according to the Fast Fourier Transform Method. The FFT trace represents the PMD delay in ps.

Display of PMD results

The PMD results screen presents zones from the top to bottom displaying:

– the file name (if the result is stored in the memory).– characteristics specific to PMD test: module name, number of acqui-

sitions used for the statistics (Acq), wavelength range (1525-1610), fiber number (N:), fiber length in defined unit, date and time of acqui-sition.

Fig. 50 PMD measurement with a 81XXX plug-in

Fiber under test

JumperJumperOBS-55

Signal input socket on the ODM plug-in

140 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 7 Polarization Mode Dispersion MeasurementDisplay of results

– the trace (with the scale and the method in the right top corner). – the results associated with cursors A and/or B (according to their

selection).– a message giving the acquisition in progress status or requesting to

make the next step.– the table of results: PMD delay and coefficient, PMD2 delay and

coefficient. This table has only one line if statistics have not been selected when configuring the acquisition in the PMD TEST SETUP menu (see «Mode» on page 132).

PMD trace with FFT methodThe trace represents the delay distribution trace (in ps).

Fig. 51 Example of a result obtained with the FFT method

Module reference

Number of acquisitions

Wavelength

Spectrum/FFT

PMD Coefficient

PMD delay in picoseconds

PMD second order coefficient

PMD second order delay

Fiber Length

Coupling Direction Alarm indicator

NOTEWhen several acquisitions are performed, the trace resulting from the last acquisition is displayed.

User Manual 780000102/12 141

Chapter 7 Polarization Mode Dispersion MeasurementStatistics results

The results are displayed in black when no alarm is defined, in green if alarms are within the threshold defined in the Setup menu and in red if the alarms exceed the thresholds defined.

Cursor (within Spectrum display)To move the cursor(s) on the trace, press the Cursor menu key, then use the direction arrow keys and or and . The coordinates of each cursor intersection with the trace are indicated underneath the trace:

Zoom (within Spectrum display)In order to zoom in on the trace, press the Zoom/Shift menu key to display Zoom, then use the direction arrow keys to zoom in either hori-zontally or vertically.

The zoom of the display is made around the selected cursor(s).

Trace shifting (within Spectrum display)To shift the trace horizontally or vertically, press the Zoom/Shift menu key, then use the direction arrow keys to make the required shift.

Statistics resultsStatistics can be performed on a series of samples defined by the time between two consecutive samples (Wait period) and the number of samples. The choice of these parameters must be done in the PMD SETUP menu (Acquisition mode): see «Acquisition parameters» on page 132.

To display the statistic results press the RESULTS button.

NOTETo reset the zoom and see the full trace, press Full scale.

NOTEIn FFT display mode, data is displayed with an automatically calcu-lated zoom.

142 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 7 Polarization Mode Dispersion MeasurementStatistics results

Table of results When the statistics are activated, the results are in a table giving for the four parameters (PMD delay and coefficient, PMD2 delay and coeffi-cient): current value, average value, min value, max. value and standard deviation (Sdev). The statistic results in the table are automatically updated with each acquisition.

Graphics display

When Statistic mode is selected, the button Spectrum/FFT becomes Spectrum/FFT/Drift/Barchart.

This button allows therefore to display alternatively two new windows :

– The trace showing the delay drift during the acquisition time

In Drift mode, the cursor can be moved on each measurement by clicking on the key Previous Acq. or Next Acq..

– The histogram providing the delay value for each acquisition

Fig. 52 Example of drift

Fig. 53 Example of histogram

User Manual 780000102/12 143

Chapter 7 Polarization Mode Dispersion MeasurementStatistics results

Information messages

Under the trace, at the right-hand corner a message indicates the current status of the trace or proposes the step to do next (by clicking on Stop wait).

Signal acquisitionThis message indicates that an acquisition is in the process of being carried out.

To stop an acquisition, whatever the mode is used, press the START/STOP button.

Then, press either the button SETUP to go back to the Base Unit config-uration menu or press the button START/STOP to start a new identical acquisition.

Next measurementAfter each acquisition in the Statistic mode and when Long term has bee set on Period or Manual, this message requests that you select Stop Wait. The Base Unit then displays Signal Acquisition. Push the START/STOP button to stop the cycle if necessary.

Ready to make cycleThis message appears after a acquisition cycle is terminated, when you are in statistic mode. Press START/STOP to start a new cycle.

Ready to make MeasureThe message is displayed after the completion of a Single mode acqui-sition sample or a Reference measurement. Either, press the SETUP button to return to the Base Unit configuration menu or START/STOP button to start the same acquisition sample. This message is also displayed in continued mode, if the button START/STOP has been used to stop and restart a measurement.

Waiting bargraphWhen Statistic mode is used and Long term is set to Period, a bargraph displays on the right of the results, the remaining time before the next acquisition.

144 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 7 Polarization Mode Dispersion MeasurementFile Management

File Management

Storing PMD results

If you had entered Auto store, then the results will be saved automati-cally. If not, or if you want to store the results under another name, directory etc.:

1 Click on the FILE key

2 Select Setup with the key Setup/Explorer.

3 Modify the parameters you want

4 Click on Store Trace

The PMD traces are stored with the extension «.PMD».

Recalling PMD files

Once a PMD file has been stored, recall it using the Explorer:

1 Select Explorer with the key Setup/Explorer.

2 Using directions keys, select the directory and then the file to open

3 Click on Load

4 Click on View Tace(s) or Load Trace + Config.The selected file is opened

For further informations on file management, see Chapter 14 “File management”.

PMD standards and limits

Table 1 List of the appropriate standards and limits for PMD.

Standards Description Limits

ITU-T G.650 Definition and test methods for the rele-vant parameters of single-mode fibers

PMD method is provided

ITU-T G.652 Characteristics of a single-mode optical fiber cable

PMD Coefficient < 0.5 ps/square (km) at 1550 nm

User Manual 780000102/12 145

Chapter 7 Polarization Mode Dispersion MeasurementPMD standards and limits

Limit of the second order coefficient: PMD2 <0.2 ps/nm.km

Some organizations and standards are stating that 10% of the bit rate for the PMD delay can be tolerated for a system without disturbing the network performance by more than 1 dB loss, at 1550 nm, with NRZ coding:

Abacus for a typical system

You will find below the abacus for a typical system, giving the maximum distance as a function of PMD coefficient, for given transmission bit rates.

This abacus is provided with the following assumptions:

– the PMD is considered to be Maxwelliam,– NRZ coding is used, – 1550 nm lasers are used, – a maximum power penalty of 1 dB is acceptable, – a BER is typically between 10-9 and 10-12.

ITU-T G.653 Characteristics of a dispersion-shifted sin-gle-mode optical fiber cable

PMD Coefficient < 0.5 ps/square (km) at 1550 nm

ITU-T G.655 Characteristics of a non-zero dispersion-shifted single-mode optical fiber cable

PMD Coefficient < 0.5 ps/square (km) at 1550 nm

ITU-T G.69chapter 6.3.2.3

Optical interfaces for single channel STM-64, STM-256 systems and other SDH systems with optical amplifiers

No specified limit. Refer to cable/fiber prop-erties

Table 1 List of the appropriate standards and limits for PMD.

Standards Description Limits

Bit Rate Per Channel SDH SONET Equivalent

Time-slotPMD Delay Limit

PMD Coefficient For 400 km

2.5 Gbit/s STM-16 OC-48 401 ps 40 ps <2

10 Gbit/s STM-64 OC-192 100 ps 10 ps <0.5

40 Gbit/s STM-256 OC-768 25.12 ps 2.5 ps <0.125

10G Ethernet Ethernet — — 5 ps 0.25

146 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 7 Polarization Mode Dispersion MeasurementPMD standards and limits

With this in mind, the following formula could be applied (L is the distance in km, B the bit rate in Gbit/s, PMD the PMD value in ps/km1/2):

L (km)= 104 x 1/(B x PMD)

Fig. 54 Abacus for a typical system (maximum distance as a function of PMD coefficient, for standard bit rates)

Maximum Distance vs PMD coefficient and Data Bit Rate

1

10

100

1000

10000

100000

0,01 0,1 1 10 100

PMD ( ps/km 1/2)

Dis

tanc

e (k

m)

A.C.

10 Gbit/s10 Gbit/s

40 Gbit/s40 Gbit/s

2.5 Gbit/s2.5 Gbit/s STM16/OC-48

STM64/OC-192

STM128/OC-748

User Manual 780000102/12 147

Chapter 7 Polarization Mode Dispersion MeasurementPMD standards and limits

148 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 8 Attenuation profile

8

This chapter describes the different steps in carrying out a Attenuation Profile (AP) measurement with a Base Unit equipped with a 81WDMPMD (full-band plug-in) or an ODM Module.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

– «Recommended equipment» on page 150– «AP Setup menu» on page 150– «AP Measurement» on page 153– «Performing a AP measurement» on page 156– «Display of AP results» on page 158– “File Management” on page 160

It is assumed that you are familiar with the operation of the Base Unit and the Optical Broadband Source you are using.

User Manual 780000102/12 149

Chapter 8 Attenuation profileRecommended equipment

Recommended equipmentTo perform a AP measurement, the following equipment is recom-mended:

– Base Unit with a plug-in or module as referenced above, and associ-ated optical connector.

– OBS-55 or BBS2A1, or any other Optical Broadband Source with associated optical connectors.

– Fiber scope with associated optical connectors.– Cleaning kit.– Two jumpers with associated optical connectors.– One coupler.– Communication tool (either GSM or telephone, or optical talk set).

AP Setup menuAfter connecting the fiber to be tested and all the equipment is switched on and ready for use, you will then need to set up the Base Unit to perform an AP measurement.

To access the Attenuation Profile setup menu, press the SETUP button on the Base Unit. The different measurement parameters are displayed.

To modify a parameter, use the direction arrow keys et . The possible options will then be displayed. To change an option, use the direction arrow keys and to make a choice.

1.The OBS-55 Optical Broadband Source covers S+C+L bands. The 81BBS2A covers the OESCL bands.

150 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 8 Attenuation profileAP Setup menu

The different parameters proposed are described below. You may:

– either choose the default values by pressing the Test Auto key– either define your own configuration.

Test Auto configurationSetup Menu

Acquisition:

– Averaging acquisition: No

Results Screen:

– Wavelength range: full– Normalized to km: No

File menu

– File naming: Auto– Auto store: Yes– Fiber Nb Increment: Yes

In standard mode, you can set the parameters below.

Fig. 55 Configuration menu for AP test

User Manual 780000102/12 151

Chapter 8 Attenuation profileAP Setup menu

Acquisition parameters

Acquisition band – OESCL Full band will be considered for acquisition. – SCL Only S, C and L bands shall be considered for acquisi-

tion.

Averaging acquisition

Only considered for measurement, not for reference, it is used to improve the dynamic range of the unit:

– No No average of the acquisition sample to be performed.– Low Low averaging (4 samples).– Medium Medium averaging (16 samples).– High High averaging (32 samples).

Make Reference – Yes: Option to select if you wish to perform a reference before performing the AP measurement.

– No: Default option. The instrument automatically sets back to this option after the reference has been performed.

The date of the last reference is displayed below this field.

Measurements Fiber lengthThe fiber length must be set to provide the AP result. Use the numeric keypad or the direction keys to modify the fiber length (Min = 0.100 km / Max = 300 km).

Unit– Km Distance unit defined in kilometers.

NOTEWhen the composite power of the input signal is higher than 20 dBm, a warning is displayed and the signal is cut off

NOTEAn increase of the averaging can improve the dynamic range to up to 5 dB.

152 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 8 Attenuation profileAP Measurement

– Kfeet Distance unit defined in kilofeet.– Miles Distance unit defined in miles.

Results Screen Wavelength Range– Full Displays results along the full band– S+C+L Band Displays results along S, C + L bands.– C+L Band Displays results along C + L bands.– Manual Displays results between 2 user defined wavelengths.

The user must then select the wavelength to <start> with and the wavelength to <end> with.

– ITUCWDM Displays the ITU-T G.694.2 CWDM channels exclu-sively

– ITUDWDM Displays the ITU-T G.694.1 DWDM channels exclu-sively

With ITUDWDM parameter, spacing of channels can be fixed at: 25 GHz, 50 GHz, 100 GHz or 200 GHz.

– Telecom Displays 4 wavelengths: 1310 / 1480 / 1550 / 1625 nm

Modify Inc.Wavelength if necessary in the mode edition menu. This parameter is used to define how many points shall be considered in the table and spectrum analysis.

Normalized to km– No The AP result shall be provided in dB.– Yes The AP result shall be provided id dB/km (result calcu-

lated according to fiber length and total attenuation).

AP MeasurementOn the measurement examples below, only the OBS-55 will be described. However, it can be easily replaced by E81BBS2A.

1 Select the AP function in the Instrument SYSTEM menu. To do this, press the SYSTEM button, then select the AP function, and press the key .

User Manual 780000102/12 153

Chapter 8 Attenuation profileAP Measurement

2 Press the button RESULTS to display the auto-calibration status. A bargraph tuning informs of the progression state of the calibration at the bottom of the screen. Wait for the calibration to be fully completed before continuing.

3 Press the button SETUP to access to the Base Unit configuration menu for Spectrum analysis. Use the keys and to move the cursor to the different parameters and the keys and to modify a value.

Performing the reference

It is recommended before performing an AP measurement, at least once a day, to carry out a reference measurement of the broadband source.

To make a reference, connect your OBS-55 or BBS to your Base Unit just like shown on figure below.

Fig. 56 Selection of the AP function (8000 series example)

Fig. 57 Reference measurement

Coupler

JumperJumper

OBS-55

Signal input socket situated on the ODM module

154 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 8 Attenuation profileAP Measurement

1 Check that the option Make Reference is set to Yes in the configu-ration menu.

2 Press the button START/STOP to start the reference of the broad-band source. To display the results, press the button RESULTS. Once the reference is correct, AP measurement may take place.

A bargraph shows if the source power level will allow to perform AP measurements correctly.

Weak StrongIf the reference measurement does not provide a correct result, check the following points:

NOTEWhen a reference is performed, acquisition parameters are not taken in account.

Fig. 58 Example of a correct reference for a broadband source

Error message Possible problem Possible solution

Acquisition impossibleHit any key to con-tinue

Auto-calibration is not completed

Wait for the calibration to be termi-nated

User Manual 780000102/12 155

Chapter 8 Attenuation profilePerforming a AP measurement

Performing a AP measurementWhen the reference measurement of the broadband source has been completed, use the following procedure to make a measurement:

1 Disconnect the coupler and connect each end to each extremity of the fiber.

2 Press the SETUP button to access the Base Unit configuration menu.

3 Select the appropriate AP test setup according to your application as earlier defined in «AP Setup menu» on page 150.

4 Press the START/STOP button to see the results within a few seconds.

5 Repeat the AP measurement for every fiber to be tested (it will have to be connected to the OBS-55).

Signal level too low !Check source and connectionsHit any key to con-tinue

The OBS-55 (or other source) is not switched on

Press the ON/OFF button to switch on the source, verify if <Make reference> is still set to <Yes>, then repeat step 2

The OBS-55 (or other source) bat-tery is too low

Check if the LOW-BATT red led is lighted. If yes, then recharge the bat-tery.

Defective connec-tions

Check that the cables are properly connected, and the notches on the connectors are correctly aligned.

Error message Possible problem Possible solution

156 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 8 Attenuation profilePerforming a AP measurement

Fiber under test

JumperJumper

OBS-55

Signal input socket on the ODM plug-in

NOTEYou may modify the fiber length at any time without performing a mea-surement again. The AP result pro kilometer will be recalculated auto-matically.

User Manual 780000102/12 157

Chapter 8 Attenuation profileDisplay of AP results

Display of AP resultsThe AP results screen presents different zones (see: «Example of a AP result (Showing profile)» on page 158)

Trace display

Spectrum/ProfileFor a reference measurement, only the spectrum is available.

For a AP measurement, two different graphs may be visualized.

Fig. 59 Example of a AP result (Showing profile)

Module reference

Wavelength range

Profile attenuation (dB/km)

Current selected wavelength

Total loss (dB)

Fiber Length

DirectionFile name

Results table

NOTEWhen several acquisitions are performed, the trace resulting from the last acquisition is displayed.

158 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 8 Attenuation profileDisplay of AP results

The first graph shows the final spectrum (see figure «Example of a spec-trum view after a measurement» on page 159).

.

The second graph, the attenuation profile, shows the difference between the final spectrum and the reference spectrum of the broadband source (see figure «Example of a AP result (Showing profile)» on page 158).

You may switch from the «Profile» view to the final «Spectrum» view using the button Spectrum/Profile.

ZoomIn order to zoom in on the trace, press the Zoom/Shift menu key to display Zoom, then use the direction arrow keys to zoom in either hori-zontally or vertically.

The zoom of the display is made around the selected cursor(s).

Fig. 60 Example of a spectrum view after a measurement

NOTEThe Trace — Table and Wavelength functions are available exclu-sively with the Profile mode.

NOTETo reset the zoom and see the full trace, press Full scale.

User Manual 780000102/12 159

Chapter 8 Attenuation profileFile Management

Trace shiftingTo shift the trace horizontally or vertically, press the Zoom/Shift menu key to display Shift, then use the direction arrow keys to make the required shift.

CursorTo move the cursor(s) on the trace, press the Cursor menu key, then use the direction arrow keys and or and . The coordinates of each cursor intersection with the trace are indicated underneath the trace.

WavelengthTo move the cursor from one wavelength to the next one, press the Wavelength menu key and use the arrow keys and or and . The cursor will move both on the trace and in the table (if the trace and/or the results table is displayed).

Results table Trace/TableEnables the display on the trace and/or the results table.

8 lines of the results can be displayed below the trace, or 20 lines with no trace.

The results table shows for each wavelength (calculated using the wave-length range and the incrementation parameter as seen in «Wavelength Range» on page 153), the attenuation profile in dB/km and the total loss in dB.

File Management

Storing Attenuation

Profile measurements

If you had entered Auto store, then the results will be saved automati-cally. If not, or if you want to store the results under another name, directory etc.:

1 Click on the FILE key

160 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 8 Attenuation profileFile Management

2 Select Setup with the key Setup/Explorer.

3 Modify the parameters you want

4 Click on Store Trace

The Attenuation Profile traces are stored with the extension «.AP».

Recalling AP files

Once an AP file has been stored, recall it using the Explorer:

1 Select Explorer with the key Setup/Explorer.

2 Using directions keys, select the directory and then the file to open

3 Click on Load

4 Click on View Tace(s) or Load Trace + Config.The selected file is opened

For further informations on file management, see Chapter 14 “File management”

User Manual 780000102/12 161

Chapter 8 Attenuation profileFile Management

162 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 9 CD measurements using pulse delay method

9

The 5083CD module (+ the 50otdrExt extension ) makes available three functions:

– CD analyzer,– Reflectometer,– Laser source.

The OTDR function is described in «Reflectometry measurements» on page 45.

The source function is described in the chapter «Source function» on page 184.

The Chromatic Dispersion analyzer function is described in all the rest of this chapter. The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

– «Configuring the instrument» on page 164– «Configuring the CD test» on page 164– «Making a chromatic dispersion measurement» on page 169– “File Management” on page 182– «CD standards and limits» on page 183– «Source function» on page 184

User Manual 780000102/12 163

Chapter 9 CD measurements using pulse delay methodConfiguring the instrument

Configuring the instrumentAfter connecting the fiber under test to the optical connector of the 5083CD module of the Base Unit, you must select the CD function. To do this, press the SYSTEM button. If the instrument is equipped with more than one plug-in, or if the sole plug-in provides more than one function:

– use the direction keys and , to select the function: the icon under the cursor is framed in green.

– select the function by pressing : the icon turns orange-yellow.

Configuring the CD testTo configure a chromatic dispersion measurement on a fiber, press the SETUP button. The different measurement parameters will be displayed.

You have two choices: press the Test Auto to obtain the default config-uration, or define your own configuration.

Parameters chosen by automatic configuration:Laser: AllMode: AutoAnalysis window Auto (automatically positionned on the end

of fiber)Time of measurement: 00:25Reference wavelength: 1550 nmIndex: 1.465Measurement zone: linkApproximation formula: Sellmeier 5T Type of fiber: Standard1st analysis window: DispersionLower wavelength: 1255.0 nmUpper wavelength: 1650.0 nmInc. wavelength : 5 nmStandardized to 1km : YesUnit km

164 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 9 CD measurements using pulse delay methodConfiguring the CD test

To define your own configuration, choose the parameter to be modified, using the direction keys, then choose the option for this parameter with the keys and .

The configuration parameters of the CD test are described below.

Acquisition parameters

LaserChoose to carry out the acquisition :

– either on one of the 4 wavelengths proposed: 1310, 1480, 1550 or 1625 nm

– or on all the wavelengths (All).

ModeChoose the mode of acquisition:

Manual : Acquisition carried out on an analysis window of width 500 m positioned manually in the end of fiber zone or on a Fresnel (its position must be defined by the following “Analysis window” parameter).

End of fiber: End of fiber detected by a reflectometry measurement.

Auto: After automatic detection of the end of the fiber, a CD measurement is taken on all four wavelengths.

Fig. 61 Configuration of CD test

User Manual 780000102/12 165

Chapter 9 CD measurements using pulse delay methodConfiguring the CD test

Analysis windowIn manual mode, enter the distance of the reflective event to be analyzed (Fresnel), corresponding, for example, to the end of the fiber. The param-etrization value will correspond to the center of the analysis window.

Measurement timeChoose the duration of acquisition between 25 seconds and 10 minutes.

If the acquisition is performed on a single wavelength, this is the acquisi-tion time for that wavelength.

If the acquisition is performed on all 4 wavelengths, it is the total acquisi-tion time for all the wavelengths, bearing in mind that:

– 1/5 of this time is dedicated to acquisitions on wavelengths 1480, 1550, 1625 nm,

– 2/5 of this timed is dedicated to acquisition on 1310 nm, as this demands a higher number of averagings.

If the acquisition is done in auto mode, the time shown does not take into account the time of detection of fiber ends (30 seconds)

Parameters of analysis

Ref. wavelengthChoose one of the 4 wavelengths: the result of the measurement for this wavelength will be the reference for calculation of delays obtained for the other wavelengths.

Index of RefractionChoose the group index N of the fiber from values lying between 1.30000 and 1.70000.

NOTEThis index value is unique, and is not attached to a wavelength. It is used for all acquisitions carried out on the CD tab and is saved with the trace.

NOTEIt is advisable to use the index at 1550 nm, to obtain a correct end of fiber measurement.

166 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 9 CD measurements using pulse delay methodConfiguring the CD test

Measurement zone Select the method of measurement of chromatic dispersion:

Link Measurement of the whole link from one end.Section Measure one section from an extremity, making two

acquisitions on each extremity of the section See «Measurement of CD on a section» on page 180.

Approximation formulaSelect the delay approximation formula to be used for generation of the dispersion and slope curves:

Please refer to ITU-T G.650.1 or IEC 60793 1-42 for further information.

Quadratic A+Bλ+Cλ2. Recommended for G.653 fibers, in the 1550 nm area.

Sellmeier 3-term A+Bλ2+Cλ−2. Recommended for G.652 fibers in the 1310 nm area.

Sellmeier 5-term A+Bλ2+Cλ-2+Dλ4+Eλ-4. Recommended in all other cases, including non-homogeneous fibers.

(see «Most suitable method of approximation according to trace zone» on page 14).

Fiber TypeChoose the fiber type you want to measure: Standard / Special.

Select Special for a link having a fiber section with shifted dispersion.

For the other cases, select Standard.

Results Screen parameters

Alarms None None selected. Selecting this option removes access to the Auto Values and Bit rate info. options (they will disappear from the screen).

Active To include any survey alarms. The following fields are then enabled.

User Manual 780000102/12 167

Chapter 9 CD measurements using pulse delay methodConfiguring the CD test

Auto Values: YesThreshold values and analysis band are automatically calculated and adjusted in accordance with the selected information from the Bit rate info. table.

Bit rate info. A table to the right of this option appears when Auto Values is set to Yes. This table lists the available transport rates that can be used. To make a choice, use the direction arrow keys and .

Auto values: NoThreshold values are entered manually: select the analysis band and the max dispersion threshold.

Analysis Band This option appears when Auto Values is set to No. Select 1550 nm or C+L band. The max dispersion threshold will be considered only on that channel or band.

Disp. Max (ps/nm) This option appears when Auto Values is set to No. Select here the max dispersion threshold (from <200 to < 90000 ps/nm).

The results are given in the form of curves (delay, dispersion, slope) and a table of results (of which 8 lines are displayed if the Table function is selected).

1st analysis window

This parameter can be change exclusively if Auto Mode has been selected in the acquisition parameters/

Choose the curve which will by displayed automatically at the end of the acquisition:

Markers: reflectometry curves with markersDispersion: dispersion curve

NOTEMax. dispersion threshold is always considered on non normalized dispersion values.

168 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 9 CD measurements using pulse delay methodMaking a chromatic dispersion measurement

Min. wavelength Lower limit of the wavelength displayed on the curve and in the table:

– from 1255.0 nm to 1640.0 nm

Max. wavelength Upper limit of the wavelength displayed on the curve and in the table:

– from 1265.0 nm to 1650.0 nm

Inc. wavelength Choose wavelength difference between two results memorized in the table.

– from 0.10 to 50 nm – the number of results memorized depends on the limit values

and the value of the increment chosen: — max. 512 results.

Normalized to km Yes The dispersion value obtained is standardized to 1 km (that is to say, divided by the length of the fiber expressed in km).

Unit Select the unit to be used: km / kfeet / miles.

Making a chromatic dispersion measurement

Measurement process

This measurement is made in 3 stages:

1 Detection of end of fiber by a reflectometry measurement. This stage is indispensable if the length of the fiber is not known.

2 Placing of markers on the End of fiber event: a second reflectometry measurement in the end of fiber zone is made for the 4 wavelengths (1310, 1480, 1550, 1625 nm). The result is 4 Fresnels on which the markers are placed. One of the Fresnels having been chosen as the reference, the delay or advance of the others is measured with respect to this.

User Manual 780000102/12 169

Chapter 9 CD measurements using pulse delay methodMaking a chromatic dispersion measurement

3 Calculation of dispersion on the basis of the position of the markers (see «Method of CD measurement used by the Base Unit» on page 12).

Conditions of measurement

If the end of fiber is detected, but no reflective event is seen during the phase of positioning of the markers, then a 0 dB termination connector should be placed at the end of the fiber (this connector is supplied as an accessory with the CD module). It increases the end of fiber Fresnel peak amplitude and thus enables the measurement. The limit of automatic detection is about 24 dB for the attenuation of the link (120 km at 0.2 dB/km at 1550 nm). In manual mode, it is about 30 dB.

Measurements of chromatic dispersion are generally made with 4 markers at 1310, 1480, 1550 and 1625 nm. However, if only three markers can be positioned, the measurement can still be made, though with reduced accuracy. In this case, the message “Measurement 3 lambdas” is displayed.

To optimize the measurements, it is advisable not to place the markers on saturated Fresnels . If this happens, a message appears. It is then advisable to add an on-line attenuator.

CD acquisition mode

The measurement of chromatic dispersion can use two modes of acqui-sition: automatic and manual.

Automatic acquisition mode

To make a CD measurement quickly, the automatic mode of acquisition is the easiest. It enables the Base Unit to be automatically configured with the optimum parameters of acquisition for the link under test. The 3 stages of the measurement described above are then carried out auto-matically.

To carry out a measurement of chromatic dispersion on an optical link, using the OTDR method of the Base Unit, it is necessary to have a reflective element such as a connector at the end of the fiber.

170 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 9 CD measurements using pulse delay methodMaking a chromatic dispersion measurement

To start an automatic acquisition:

– in the Configuration CD test menu, choose Mode = Auto.– press the START/STOP button.

Manual acquisition mode

The user can obtain the results step by step by using one of the following two methods:

End of fiber detection modeThis mode must be used if the end of fiber has not been correctly detected or if the user wants to test part of the link. It measures the length of the fiber before carrying out the CD measurement. To select this mode:

– In the Configuration CD test menu, choose Mode = End of Fiber,

– Press the START/STOP button. The Base Unit then automati-cally displays the result screen and the test progress bar.

– A the end of the acquisition, on the OTDR trace, the cursor auto-matically positions itself on the end of fiber.

– If you consider that the marker is correctly placed on the end of fiber, press the Start CD Measure key to start the CD measure-ment.

– If you consider that the marker is not correctly placed on the end of fiber (or the event to be analyzed), adjust its position and then press Change Window to memorize this position. Press the Start Measure key to start the CD measurement.

Manual modeThis mode must be used if the acquisition does not allow the placing of markers on one or more of the four OTDR traces, due to insufficient dynamic. To select it, in the Configuration CD test menu:

– choose Mode = Manual,– augment the acquisition time to enable correct detection of the

end of the fiber or the reflective event to be analyzed.– press the START/STOP button to start the CD measurement

If an OTDR acquisition is in progress, the key START CD MEASURE is not displayed.

User Manual 780000102/12 171

Chapter 9 CD measurements using pulse delay methodMaking a chromatic dispersion measurement

End of acquisition After an acquisition on the 4 wavelengths (or after recall of CD results memorized), the result screen displays the traces acquired:

Choice of CD result

The Delay, Dispersion and Slope keys give access to the corre-sponding results, which depend on the zone of measurement, the formula of approximation and the upper wavelength and lower wave-length selected in the Configuration CD TEST menu. See «Delay, disper-sion and slope results» on page 176.

Return to this chosen screen

To return to the choice of CD result to be displayed, press the Exit key.

NOTEIf the reflective events are drowned in noise, it is advisable to use ter-mination connectors. See «Typical specifications of CD OTDR plug-ins» on page 290.

Fig. 62 Traces acquired

172 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 9 CD measurements using pulse delay methodMaking a chromatic dispersion measurement

Configuration To operate on these traces (positioning markers, zoom, shift, etc.) press the Config. key: see «Placing of markers» on page 175.

Information always

displayed

Whatever the mode of acquisition chosen, the following information is always displayed on the result screen:

– Wavelength– Name of module– Pulse width– Resolution– Acquisition time– Refractive index– Name of file (if stored)– Fiber number– Direction of propagation– The information associated with cursors A and B: the A and B hori-

zontal and vertical values, the A-B horizontal and vertical difference, as an absolute value.

– The difference value in dB expressed per kilometre.– The alarm indicator or if Alarms is active.

Detection of end of fiber

This mode must be used if the end of fiber has not been correctly detected in auto mode (see «End of fiber detection mode» on page 171).

The screen obtained after the acquisition (or after pressing the RESULTS button), displays the information seen in the paragraph «Information always displayed» on page 173, together with:

– the OTDR detection trace– a zone at the bottom of the screen giving the distance of the end of

fiber and the position of the center of the future analysis window.– the OTDR detection mini-trace to the left of the bar

User Manual 780000102/12 173

Chapter 9 CD measurements using pulse delay methodMaking a chromatic dispersion measurement

Functions available

<Start CD measure> To start the CD measurement.

<Cursor A/Cursor B> To displace cursor A and/or B: use the Cursor key (Cursor A/Cursor B) to select the cursor or cursors, then use the keys and .

<Zoom/Shift> To shift the trace horizontally or vertically: press this key to display Shift, then use the keys and

until the desired shift is attained. <Change window> You can change the position of the analysis

window, centered on the cursor, in which a Fresnel peak is present (due to a connector, for example). To do this, position the cursor, then press the Change window key to confirm your choice. The message “Analysis window centered at x.xx km” is updated.

Fig. 63 Detection of end of fiber

If an OTDR acquisition is in progress, the key START CD MEASURE is not displayed.

174 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 9 CD measurements using pulse delay methodMaking a chromatic dispersion measurement

Placing of markers After acquisition on the 4 wavelengths, if the markers have not been automatically placed on the basis of the result screen, press the Config. key to position them manually.

Information displayed for the

markers

The configuration screen of the markers displays the general information (see «Information always displayed» on page 173) together with the infor-mation specific to the positioning of the markers:

– The OTDR traces displayed in a window and showing markers– The distance with respect to the origin of each marker for each

trace.– The difference of each marker from the reference marker.– The OTDR mini-trace to the left of the bar.– Specific keys with which the markers can be modified.

Fig. 64 Placing markers

Wavelength of the active trace

User Manual 780000102/12 175

Chapter 9 CD measurements using pulse delay methodMaking a chromatic dispersion measurement

To position a marker:

– Select the trace on which you wish to position the marker by pressing the Select Lambda key repeatedly until its wavelength is displayed in the bar.

– To position the marker automatically at the summit of the reflec-tive event of the active trace, press the key Auto Marker.

– To position the marker manually, place the active cursor at the desired position, then press Manual Marker.

Functions available<Lambda> Activates one of the 4 traces : the wavelength of the

active trace is shown at the top left of the screen.<Zoom/Shift> To shift the trace horizontally or vertically, press this

key to show <Shift>, then use the keys and until the desired shift is obtained.

<Cursor A/Cursor B>To displace cursor A and/or B press the key to show <Cursor A/Cursor B>), then use the keys and . The wavelengths on which the cursors are positioned are displayed in the bar of the trace, together with the difference in wavelength and power between the cursors.

<Auto Marker> Places the marker automatically at the peak of the reflective event of the active trace.

<Manual Marker> Places the marker on the active cursor.If cursors A and B are both selected, the marker will not be moved. If the cursor is close to the marker, the latter will be deleted.

<Set Ref.>: This key is grayed unless the zone of measurement chosen in the configuration menu is “Section”. See «Measurement of CD on a section» on page 180.

<Exit> Returns to the preceding result selection screen (Delay, Dispersion, Slope).

Delay, dispersion and

slope results

These results depend on the choices made in the configuration menu: upper and lower wavelengths, incrementation step and standardization to 1 km.

176 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 9 CD measurements using pulse delay methodMaking a chromatic dispersion measurement

Information displayed for the

results

The result screen obtained after pressing one of the keys <Delay>, <Dispersion> or <Slope> displays the same standard information (see «Information always displayed» on page 173), together with the following information:

– The curve requested (delay, dispersion or slope) is displayed– A line of characteristics specific to the measurement of slope, delay

and dispersion is displayed above the trace:– L0: Dispersion wavelength zero– So: Slope associated with L0– Lref: Length of the fiber at the reference wavelength– Wref : Reference wavelength– Fit: Formula of approximation used

– A line of the results table. By selecting Table with the Trace/Table key, 8 lines of the of results can be displayed below the trace, or 20 lines with no trace.

Fig. 65 Measurement of dispersion

User Manual 780000102/12 177

Chapter 9 CD measurements using pulse delay methodMaking a chromatic dispersion measurement

Choice of curve – If the delay curve was requested, it will be possible to change over to the dispersion curve and add the slope curve to it (Click on Add Slope).

– If the dispersion curve was requested, it will be possible to add the slope curve and change over to the delay curve.

– If the slope curve was requested, it will be possible to add the dispersion curve and change over to the delay curve.

When a curve is added, the screen is divided so that both curves can be displayed.

Functions available

<Add Slope> (or <Add Disp.> depending on the first trace displayed) The screen is divided into two parts for the simultaneous display of the dispersion and slope curves.

NOTEIf the table is displayed first, it will disappear when the curve is added.

If it is desired to display or redisplay the table after addition of the slope curve, the latter must first be erased by clicking on Exit or Delete Slope.

Fig. 66 Example of display of two curves

178 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 9 CD measurements using pulse delay methodMaking a chromatic dispersion measurement

<Delete Slope> (or <Delete Disp.>) Returns to the display of the dispersion (or the slope) alone.

<Trace/Table> Displays the trace alone, the table alone or both, depending on the boxes marked. When both are requested, the size of the trace is reduced so as to display 8 lines of results in the table.

<Cursor A/Cursor B> The cursor or cursors selected are displaced along the trace by means of the and keys. The displacement step is as defined in the configuration menu of the CD test (Results /Inc. Wavelength). The result corresponding to the position of the cursor on the trace is highlighted in the table.

<Wavelength> When the function is activated, the and keys cause the table of results (which may contain up to 512 lines) to scroll across the screen. The active cursor then follows this displacement on the trace.

Fig. 67 Example of display of the table

Result linked to cursor Scrolling of the table

Displacement of cursor

User Manual 780000102/12 179

Chapter 9 CD measurements using pulse delay methodMaking a chromatic dispersion measurement

Alarms Results lying outside the thresholds selected by the user in the Alarm field (Max dispersion), will be displayed in red in the table, and the icon

will appear at the top right of the screen. If all the results lie within the thresholds (no result is in red), the icon becomes .

Measurement of CD on a section

The CD method, provided by the Base Unit, allows to measure the CD not only of the entire link, but also of sections of the fiber. This feature may be useful if 2 different types of fibers are used on one link.

To make such a measurement, the section must be separated by specific events, such as reflective events (or Fresnel) like connectors.

Acquiring a trace for CD

measurement on a section

The process to measure the CD results of a section located between event X and Y, is as follows:

– Select in the SETUP menu: Measure area = Section.– Select for the window analysis, the distance to the X event.– Perform a CD measurement– Save the trace (FILE key, see “File Management” on page 182)– Select for the window analysis, the distance to the Y event

(SETUP menu).– Perform a new CD measurement.– Load the trace having the CD results up to the X event by

pressing Load followed by Load Measure Ref. in the File menu.

You may now see the CD results for the specific section.

The different measurements must be performed with the same mod-ule.

180 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 9 CD measurements using pulse delay methodMaking a chromatic dispersion measurement

The key RAZ Section orig. allows to reset to zero the origin of the section.

The key Copy Section orig. allows to copy the origin of the section.

CD measurement on a section using

stored traces

The process to measure the CD results of a section located between 2 events X and Y, is as follows:

– Load the trace containing the CD results up to the Y event, by pressing Load followed by View Trace in the file menu.

– Select in the CD SETUP menu: Measure area = Section– Load the trace having the CD results up to the X event by

pressing Load followed by Load Measure Ref. in the File menu.

When storing the trace, all those parameters will be taken into account and stored.

If the link is too long to make a CD measurement from one single extremity, a bidirectional measurement can be done.

To do so, the fibre must have specific elements (for example, reflective events or Fresnels) such as the connectors, measurable from the link extremities.

Fig. 68 CD measurement on a section

Origin

User Manual 780000102/12 181

Chapter 9 CD measurements using pulse delay methodFile Management

File Management

Storing CD measurements

If you had entered Auto store, then the results will be saved automati-cally. If not, or if you want to store the results under another name, directory etc.:

1 Click on the FILE key

2 Select Setup with the key Setup/Explorer.

3 Modify the parameters you want

4 Click on Store Trace

The Chromatic Dispersion traces are stored with the extension «.CD».

Recalling CD files

Once a CD file has been stored, recall it using the Explorer:

1 Select Explorer with the key Setup/Explorer.

2 Using directions keys, select the directory and then the file to open

3 Click on Load

4 Click on View Tace(s) or Load Trace + Config.The selected file is opened

For further informations on file management, see Chapter 14 “File management”

Measure uses two acquisitions, which must be realised with the same CD module.

182 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 9 CD measurements using pulse delay methodCD standards and limits

CD standards and limitsMeasurements of chromatic dispersion are only necessary in the following cases:

– Adaptation of of existing networks to transmission speeds of 10 Gbits/s or more.

– Installation of new fiber networks for transmission speeds of 10 Gbits/s or more.

– Qualification of fibers and components by manufacturers.

The conditions required for measurements of CD are invariably linked to transmission speeds per channel and at the corresponding distance. Chromatic dispersion is also an important parameter for fibers with offset dispersion (ITU-T G.653), as the zero dispersion wavelength must not be in the range of the channels (this would generate 4 mixed waves, and would oblige consequent irregular spacing between channels).

Standards relating to chromatic dispersion

Standard Description

ITU-T G.650.1 Definition and test methods for linear, deterministic attributes of singlemode fiber and cable.

IEC 60793-1-42 Optical fibers — Part 1-42: Measurement methods and test pro-cedures — chromatic dispersion

IEC 61744 Calibration of fiber optic chromatic dispersion test sets

TIA/EIA FOTP-168Chromatic dispersion measurement of multimode graded index and singlemode optical fibers by spectral group delay mea-surement in the time domain

TIA/EIA FOTP-169 Chromatic dispersion measurement of singlemode optical fibers by the phase-shift method

TIA/EIA FOTP-175 Chromatic dispersion measurement of singlemode optical fibers by the differential phase-shift method

GR-761-CORE Generic criteria for chromatic dispersion test sets

GR-2854-CORE Generic requirements for fiber optic dispersion compensators

User Manual 780000102/12 183

Chapter 9 CD measurements using pulse delay methodSource function

Calculation charts availableA typical calculation chart can be used to give the limit dispersion as a function of the speed of transmission per channel.

Calculation chart is provided by the ITU standards. Penalty gives the maximum cumulative chromatic dispersion for an attenuation of 1 dB, as a function of the speed R, given in Gbit/s. This calculation chart corre-sponds approximately to the formula: D < 105/R2.

Standards such as G.dsn from ITU-T aim to provide more accurate calcu-lation charts.

These calculation charts are given for information only. They depend on the spectral pass-band of the optical signal transmitted, the modulation, and the sensitivity of the receiver.

If the limits of chromatic dispersion are attained, then appropriate compensators can be incorporated along the link to neutralize its effect. These compensators introduce negative delay values to bring the system back within the permissible limits of CD. Telcordia gives their specifications in the document entitled «GR-2854-CORE Generic Requirements for Fiber Optic Dispersion Compensators».

Source function The CD module can also be used as a light source.

In this case, connect the fiber into which you wish to inject the light from the source to the output connector of the CD plug-in.

Transmission speed SDH SONET Total permissible dispersion at 1550 nm

for a given link (not standardized to 1 km)

2.5 Gbit/s STM-16 OC-48 12000 to 16000 ps/nm

10 Gbit/s STM-64 OC-192 800 to 1000 ps/nm

40 Gbit/s STM-256 OC-768 60 to 100 ps/nm

10G Ethernet Ethernet — 738 ps/nm

184 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 9 CD measurements using pulse delay methodSource function

To configure the CD plug-in as a light source:

1 Go into the SETUP menu of the OTDR tab of the CD plug-in.

2 Select Mode: SourceAll the menus of the OTDR are then grayed out except the laser line.

3 On the Laser line, select the wavelength desired for the source (the 4 wavelengths used for CD are available to choose from).

4 Press the START/STOP key to start or stop the laser.

User Manual 780000102/12 185

Chapter 9 CD measurements using pulse delay methodSource function

186 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 10 CD measurements using phase shift method

10

The Chromatic Dispersion analyzer function using phase shift method is available thanks to the ODM module and is described in this chapter.

Topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

– «Selection of the CD function» on page 188– «Configuring the CD test» on page 188– «Performing a Reference measurement» on page 192– «Performing a Chromatic Dispersion Measurement» on page 196– «Display of CD results» on page 197– “File Management” on page 199– «CD standards and limits» on page 200

User Manual 780000102/12 187

Chapter 10 CD measurements using phase shift methodSelection of the CD function

Selection of the CD functionYou must select the CD function from the ODM Module. To do this, press the SYSTEM button. The ODM plug-in provides more than one function.

– Select the CD icon using the direction keys and : the icon is framed in green.

– Select the function by pressing : the icon turns yellow.

A bargraph tuning informs of the progression state of the calibration at the bottom of the screen. Wait for the calibration to be fully completed before continuing.

Configuring the CD testTo configure a chromatic dispersion measurement on a fiber, press the SETUP button. The different measurement parameters will be displayed.

You have two choices: press the Test Auto to obtain the default config-uration, or define your own configuration.

Parameters chosen by automatic configuration:Known Length NoApproximation formula: Sellmeier 5TAlarm NoWavelength Range > Mode FullNormalized to km YesShow Measured points NoShow Fit Formula No

Fig. 69 Selection of the CD function

188 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 10 CD measurements using phase shift methodConfiguring the CD test

Saving parameters (see Chapter 14 “File management”):– Auto Store: Yes– Increment Fiber Number: Yes

To define your own configuration, choose the parameter to be modified, using the direction keys, then choose the option for this parameter with the keys and .

The configuration parameters of the CD test are described below.

Acquisition parameters

Last Reference / BBS Type / BBS Serial NumberThese parameters provide the relevant information related to the Broad-band source (BBS) referencing.. These parameters cannot be modified as they are automatically gener-ated after a reference measurement (see «Performing a Reference measurement» on page 192).

Measurements parameters

Known LengthNo If you do not know the fiber length, select NoYes If you know the fiber length, select Yes.

Fiber LengthIf Yes has been selected in the preceeding parameter, enter here the fiber length

Fig. 70 Configuration of CD test (with ODM Module)

User Manual 780000102/12 189

Chapter 10 CD measurements using phase shift methodConfiguring the CD test

Min.: 1 km / Max: 20000 km

Distance UnitWhen the fiber length is manually entered, choose the distance unit: km / kfeet / miles.

Approx. formulaSelect the approximation formula to be used for generation of the disper-sion and slope curves:

Please refer to ITU-T G.650.1 or IEC 60793 1-42 for further information.

Quadratic A+Bλ+Cλ2. Recommended for G.653 fibers, in the 1550 nm area.

Sellmeier 3-term A+Bλ2+Cλ−2. Recommended for G.652 fibers in the 1310 nm area.

Sellmeier 5-term A+Bλ2+Cλ-2+Dλ4+Eλ-4. Recommended in all other cases, including non-homogeneous fibers.

Lambda Log A+Bλ+C.ln (λ).

(see «Most suitable method of approximation according to trace zone» on page 14).

Results Screen parameters

Alarms None No alarm management.Active Enable the Pass/Fail evaluation according to the

defined thresholds (see below).

Auto Values: YesThe maximum dispersion tolerance is automatically set according to the bit rate information.

Bit rate info. List all available rates, . To select one, use the direction arrow keys and .

See «CD standards and limits» on page 200 for ore information about bit rate info. parameter.

190 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 10 CD measurements using phase shift methodConfiguring the CD test

Auto values: NoThreshold value is entered manually: select the the maximum dispersion threshold (ps/nm): from -1 to < 10000 ps/nm.

The Pass/Fail indication is provided in the result display (trace summary and results table).

Wavelength Range ModeThis parameter enables to set the displayed wavelength range.

– Full From 1260 to 1640 nm– S+C+L Band From 1460 to 1625 nm.– C+L Band From 1530 to 1625 nm.– C Band From 1530 to 1565 nm– ITUCWDM Displays the ITU-T G.694.2 CWDM channels exclu-

sively– ITUDWDM Displays the ITU-T G.694.1 DWDM channels exclu-

sivelyWith ITUDWDM parameter, spacing of channels can be fixed at: 25 GHz, 50 GHz, 100 GHz or 200 GHz.

– Manual Displays results between 2 user defined wavelengths. The user must then select the inf. wavelength to «start” with and the sup. wavelength to «end» with.

Normalized to km – No Total CD results of the link in ps/nm.– Yes CD results normalized to 1km, calculated according to

fiber length.

Show Measured Points

Enables to displayed the acquisition points on the Delay curve (repre-sented by black crosses).

– Yes All the measurement points will be displayed.– No The points will not be visible

NOTEMax. dispersion threshold is always considered for non normalized dispersion values.

User Manual 780000102/12 191

Chapter 10 CD measurements using phase shift methodPerforming a Reference measurement

Show Fit Formula Displays the resulting approximation equation on the upper left side of the trace display.

– Yes Equation is displayed.– No Equation is not visible.

Performing a Reference measurementIt is recommended before performing a CD measurement, at least once a day, to carry out a reference measurement of the broadband source.

To perform a reference, connect your Broadband source (OBS-55 or 81BBS2A) to the ODM module as shown below.

1 Activate the source on the distant Base Unit., and select CD func-tion.

Fig. 71 CD Reference measurement

Fig. 72 81BBS2A module activation

Coupler

JumperJumper

Signal input socket situated on the ODM module

Select

192 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 10 CD measurements using phase shift methodPerforming a Reference measurement

2 In the CD Setup page, press the Acq. Ref. sofkey.If ODM module with the CD function is used for the first time, clicking on the SETUP button directly opens the Reference setup page.

3 In Make Reference, select Yes using the direction keys and The line BBS Serial Number turns active.

4 Enter a serial number for the broadband source used.

5 Press the button START/STOP to start the reference of the broad-band source.A bargraph as this one is displayed until the end of the acquisition.Once the reference is correct, the message Valid Reference is displayed in green, and the information about this reference is displayed in the upper blue part of the screen: date and time of reference acquisition / BBS type and serial number.

Fig. 73 Setup CD Reference Measurement

User Manual 780000102/12 193

Chapter 10 CD measurements using phase shift methodPerforming a Reference measurement

If the reference measurement does not provide a correct result, check the following points:

Fig. 74 Example of a correct reference with measured points displayed

Reference validity

Reference information

Error message Possible problem Possible solutionAcquisition impossibleHit any key to continue

Auto-calibration is not completed

Wait for the calibration to be completed

Signal level too low !Check source and con-nectionsHit any key to continue

The source is not switched on

Press the Source ON/ Source OFF button to switch on the source, verify if Make reference is still set to Yes, then repeat step 3

The Source battery is too low

Check if the LOW-BATT red led is lighted. If yes, then recharge the bat-tery.

Defective connections The CD mode has not been selected on the source

Check that the cables are properly con-nected, and the notches on the con-nectors are correctly aligned.

194 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 10 CD measurements using phase shift methodPerforming a Reference measurement

Saving a reference

measurement

When the reference measurement of the broadband source has been completed, you can save the result on the hardidsk or disk of the Base Unit used (8000 or 6000 Platform).

Proceed as follow:

1 Click on the FILE button

2 Select Setup

3 Enter a filename for this reference, or click on Default Filename to apply a name by default to the reference measurement.The file has the extension «.OCD», but differs from the CD measure-ment result files as it only contains the reference points (the informa-tion on the upper part of the screen are different). See «Storing CD measurements» on page 199).

Loading existing

reference

The last reference acquisition performed with the Base Unit may be different than the reference used by the curve actually open.

In this case, the Acquisition Ref. menu will be different than the Curve Menu, in the Reference setup page.

You can replace one reference by the other, using specific softkeys:

— Load Ref From Trace: the reference which has been used for the curve actually open will be used for the next acquisitions.

— Update Trace With Ref.: apply the acquisition reference parameters to the load open curve.

Fig. 75 Acquisition Reference and Curve Reference

User Manual 780000102/12 195

Chapter 10 CD measurements using phase shift methodPerforming a Chromatic Dispersion Measurement

Performing a Chromatic Dispersion MeasurementOnce the reference measurement is correctly performed:

1 Connect the source and the ODM module at each end of the fiber under test

2 Press the SETUP button to access the CD configuration menu.

3 Select the appropriate CD test setup according to your application as earlier defined in «Configuring the CD test» on page 188.

4 Press the START/STOP button to perform CD measurement.A bargraph as this one is displayed until the end of the acquisition.

Fig. 76 Connections for the CD Measurement, using phase shift method

Fiber under test

JumperJumper

BBS

Signal input socket on the ODM plug-in

NOTEYou may modify the fiber length at any time without performing a mea-surement again. The CD result per kilometer will be recalculated auto-matically.

196 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 10 CD measurements using phase shift methodDisplay of CD results

Display of CD resultsOnce the acquisition is completed, the result curve is automatically displayed. It is always the Delay curve which is displayed first.

The appeareance of the delay curve may be different according to the parameters defined in the CD Setup Menu.

In the figure 69, the following parameters have been configured:

— Alarms Active (within the threshold defined)- Normalized to km Yes- Show Measured Points Yes- Show Fit Formula Yes

Functions available

Delay / Dispersion / Slope keyOnce the delay curve is displayed, you can move to the Dispersion, then the Slope Curve, using the Delay / Dispersion / Slope key.

Fig. 77 Delay Curve

AlarmFit Formula

Measured points

Normalized to km

NOTEIf the parameter «Normalized to km» is set to No, the result table will not display the Dispersion Coef (ps/nm.km) values.

User Manual 780000102/12 197

Chapter 10 CD measurements using phase shift methodDisplay of CD results

Trace/Table keyThis key enables to display either the trace and table (when the two boxes are marked) or the table only.

The results table shows for each wavelength (calculated using the wave-length range and the approximation formula, configured in the CD setup menu):

– the delay– the dispersion– the Dispersion Coefficient (if Normalized to km is set to Yes in the

Setup menu. If not, this column is empty).– the Slope

Fig. 78 Example of the Slope display

Fig. 79 Example of Table display

198 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 10 CD measurements using phase shift methodFile Management

The blue line at the top of the table displays the following information:

– The Bit Rate Info. used for the Pass/Fail indication– L0: zero dispersion wavelength– So: Slope at L0

Wavelength keyTo move the cursor from one wavelength to the next one, press the Wavelength key and use the arrow keys and or and . The cursor will move both on the trace and in the table.

File Management

Storing CD measurements

If you had configured Auto store, then the results will be saved automat-ically. If not, or if you want to store the results under another name, directory etc.:

1 Click on the FILE key

2 Select Setup with the key Setup/Explorer/Fiber Info.

3 Modify the parameters you want

4 Click on Store Trace softkey

The Chromatic Dispersion results are stored with the extension «.ocd».

The Reference measurement and the CD measurement files have both the extension «.ocd» but can be differentiated by the information displayed in the File signature, on upper part of the screen:

Fig. 80 File Signature for Reference and CD measurement

Reference File Signature

Measurement File Signature

User Manual 780000102/12 199

Chapter 10 CD measurements using phase shift methodCD standards and limits

Recalling reference or CD

measurement files

Once a CD file has been stored, it can be recalled using the Explorer:

1 Select Explorer with the key Setup/Explorer/Fiber Info..

2 Using directions keys, select the directory and then the file to open

3 Click on Load

4 Click on View Tace(s) or Load Trace + Config. to open a measure-ment file. Click on Open Ref to open a reference file.

For further informations on file management, see Chapter 14 “File management”

CD standards and limitsMeasurements of chromatic dispersion are only necessary in the following cases:

– Adaptation of of existing networks to transmission speeds of 10 Gbits/s or more.

– Installation of new fiber networks for transmission speeds of 10 Gbits/s or more.

– Qualification of fibers and components by manufacturers.

The conditions required for measurements of CD are invariably linked to transmission speeds per channel and at the corresponding distance. Chromatic dispersion is also an important parameter for fibers with offset dispersion (ITU-T G.653), as the zero dispersion wavelength must not be in the range of the channels (this would generate 4 mixed waves, and would oblige consequent irregular spacing between channels).

Standards relating to chromatic dispersion

Standard Description

ITU-T G.650.1 Definition and test methods for linear, deterministic attributes of singlemode fiber and cable.

IEC 60793-1-42 Optical fibers — Part 1-42: Measurement methods and test pro-cedures — chromatic dispersion

IEC 61744 Calibration of fiber optic chromatic dispersion test sets

200 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 10 CD measurements using phase shift methodCD standards and limits

Calculation charts availableA typical calculation chart can be used to give the limit dispersion as a function of the speed of transmission per channel.

Calculation chart is provided by the ITU standards. Penalty gives the maximum cumulative chromatic dispersion for an attenuation of 1 dB, as a function of the speed R, given in Gbit/s. This calculation chart corre-sponds approximately to the formula: D < 105/R2.

Standards such as G.dsn from ITU-T aim to provide more accurate calcu-lation charts.

These calculation charts are given for information only. They depend on the spectral pass-band of the optical signal transmitted, the modulation, and the sensitivity of the receiver.

TIA/EIA FOTP-168Chromatic dispersion measurement of multimode graded index and singlemode optical fibers by spectral group delay mea-surement in the time domain

TIA/EIA FOTP-169 Chromatic dispersion measurement of singlemode optical fibers by the phase-shift method

TIA/EIA FOTP-175 Chromatic dispersion measurement of singlemode optical fibers by the differential phase-shift method

GR-761-CORE Generic criteria for chromatic dispersion test sets

GR-2854-CORE Generic requirements for fiber optic dispersion compensators

Standard Description

Transmission speed SDH SONET Total permissible dispersion at 1550 nm

for a given link (not standardized to 1 km)

2.5 Gbit/s STM-16 OC-48 12000 to 16000 ps/nm

10 Gbit/s STM-64 OC-192 800 to 1000 ps/nm

40 Gbit/s STM-256 OC-768 60 to 100 ps/nm

10G Ethernet Ethernet — 738 ps/nm

User Manual 780000102/12 201

Chapter 10 CD measurements using phase shift methodCD standards and limits

If the limits of chromatic dispersion are attained, then appropriate compensators can be incorporated along the link to neutralize its effect. These compensators introduce negative delay values to bring the system back within the permissible limits of CD. Telcordia gives their specifications in the document entitled «GR-2854-CORE Generic Requirements for Fiber Optic Dispersion Compensators».

202 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 11 OFI Module

11

This chapter describes the functions of the OFI module (Optical Fiber Installation) and its use.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

– “OFI module” on page 204– “Selection of the OFI module” on page 204– “LTS function” on page 204– “FOX Function” on page 213– «Manual ORL» page 225– “File Management” on page 227

User Manual 780000102/12 203

Chapter 11 OFI ModuleOFI module

OFI moduleThe OFI module is used to make insertion loss measurements, ORL measurements and distance measurements.

The following functions are available with the OFI Module:

– Loss Test Set– FOX (Fiber Optic eXpert)

Selection of the OFI modulePush the SYSTEM button.

Select the icon to start the LTS function, and / or the icon to start the FOX function, or the icon to start the ORL function, using the key

.

LTS function

Principle of the optical power and attenua-

tion measure-ments

Power measurement

A power meter, is all that is needed to measure emitted or received power:

– to measure emitted power, connect the power meter directly to the output of the optical emitter;

– to measure the power at the input of an optical receiver, the power meter is connected to the end of the fiber, at the point where the optical receiver would be connected.

204 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 11 OFI ModuleLTS function

Attenuation measurements

(optical link loss)

For measurement of the attenuation of power in a complete link or in elements such as sections of fiber, connections or optical components, a light source and a power meter are required.

This attenuation is usually deduced from the measurement of optical power at two points:

Attenuation A(dB) = P1 (dBm) — P2 (dBm)

To perform accurate measurements, the following conditions are vital

– Use one of the light sources of the LTS or a light source which is stable both in time and as a function of temperature.

– Make sure that all connections and fibers and the receiving cell are perfectly clean.

– Use a reference link between the laser source and the test subject. If several measurements are to be made under identical light injec-tion conditions, this reference fiber must not be disconnected during the period while measurements are taking place.

Insertion loss method1 The power meter is first connected to the laser source via the refer-

ence fiber: P1 is measured.

2 Then the fiber to be tested is inserted between the reference fiber and the power meter: P2 is measured.The difference between P2 and P1 gives the attenuation of the fiber under test.It is preferable to use the same type of connector at both ends of the fiber being tested, to ensure the same connection conditions for measuring P1 and P2.

Accuracy of measurements– A high degree of accuracy is often required. It is then necessary to

perform a preliminary calibration without the fiber under test to elim-inate the losses due to connections as far as this is possible. To do this, use the «Reference Value» function.

Laser light source of the Base Unit Reference

fiberLink under test

Power meter of the Base Unit

1 2

User Manual 780000102/12 205

Chapter 11 OFI ModuleLTS function

– For measurements in the laboratory, where both ends of the fiber are on the same site, the repeatability of attenuation measurements is better than 0.1 dB. For measurements in the field, where the two ends are on different sites, variations from one measurement to another are of the order of ± 0.2 dB (using a relative measurement).

Connections to the power

meter and the source

The type of optical connector used for the power meter is UPP (Universal Push Pull), which is compatible with all diameter 2.5 mm connectors (FC, SC, ST, DIN, E2000, etc.).

Configuring the LTS

To activate the function:

– Press the SYSTEM button– Use the direction keys to select the LTS icon (framed in

green) and press the confirmation key : the icon in the frame will turn yellow.

The effect of this action will be to bring the power meter into use, but not to activate the source.

Fig. 81 Optical connectors

FOX connector Power meter connector

NOTEThe source connection is the same as the FOX port.

206 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 11 OFI ModuleLTS function

Configuring the measurement

parameters of the power meter

The measurement parameters can be accessed with the SETUP key.

Lambda Selecting wavelength: — Auto: the wavelength of the input signal will be automatically detected and selected to perform the measurement. 850, 980, 1300, 1310, 1420, 1450, 1480, 1490, 1510, 1550 or 1625 nm: measurement performed at specified wavelength. — User: choice of wavelength on the next line in the menu.

User choice (if the User option was selected in the Lambda line) selection of the wavelength between 800 nm and 1650 nm, in 1 nm steps, by means of the direction keys and .

Unit Unit of power displayed:- Watt, dBm for displaying absolute power- dB for displaying a result relative to a reference (link loss)

Reference level If dB units were chosen in the previous line, selection of the reference value for the wavelength selected. Using the direction keys, first choose the wavelength, then press the > key to access choice of the value (+XXX.XX), then confirm this value with the validation key .This reference is also automatically available, in the Results page, using the Set as Referencekey.

Attenuator compensation Choice of level to be applied to the wavelength chosen for measurement to compensate for the loss due to the external attenuator (+XX.XX dB). First use the direction keys to choose the

Fig. 82 Configuration of power measurement

User Manual 780000102/12 207

Chapter 11 OFI ModuleLTS function

wavelength, then press > to access choice of value, then confirm this value by pressing the validation key .

Configuring the alarm parameters

of the power meter

Alarm Activation of the Alarm function : any result below the lower threshold or above the upper threshold will be displayed in red on the Results page.

Lower and upper thresholds :Choice of lower and upper thresholds for each available wavelength, from -60 to +40 dBm (selected with the direction keys).

NOTETo copy a Reference Level or a Attenuator Compensator on all wave-lengths, select the reference wavelength and click on Update for All Wavel..

NOTETo copy one value of the Lower or/and Upper threshold for all wave-lengths, select the reference value and click on Update for All Wavel..

NOTEA continuous push on the direction keys, increments the value by 10 dBm.

208 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 11 OFI ModuleLTS function

Configuring and displaying the

parameters of the source

When the laser is on, the icon is displayed.

The parameters of the source can be accessed directly on the results screen of the LTS module, by pressing the Source Configuration soft key.

Wavelength To change the wavelength when a multi-wavelength source is present (depending on option).The wavelength value is displayed.

Mode To vary the mode of emission of the source. Possible modulation values are:– 270 Hz– 330 Hz– 1 kHz– 2 kHz– Auto (the sources emit on determined

frequencies to enable the power meter to detect the wavelength used automatically)

– Twintest (cyclical emission on all available wavelengths for a few seconds on each wavelength), compatible with the JDSU OLP 5/6/15/16/18.

Fig. 83 Source configuration

Source

User Manual 780000102/12 209

Chapter 11 OFI ModuleLTS function

– CW (continuous emission)The mode used is displayed, above the icon .

Power In CW mode, you can choose the emitted power:- either the nominal value: -3.5 dB- or an attenuation of -3 or -6 dBm, with regard to this nominal value, to get a power of 6.5 dBm or of 9.5 dBm.For all the other modes (270Hz / 330Hz / 1kHz / 2 kHz / Auto / Twintest), select one of the following emitted power: -12.5 , -9.5, -6.5 dBm.

Display of results and

command

The results page called up by the RESULTS button, gives the information relating to the measurement in progress, results previously saved and the commands available for measurement and saving.

Result of the measurement in

progress

The power measured by the power meter is displayed in large charac-ters, in the units selected in the SETUP menu, together with:

– the mode of transmission of the signal measured: continuous (CW) or modulated to a frequency of 270Hz, 330Hz, 1KHz, or 2KHz.

– the wavelength of the signal measured. – the reference level expressed in dB.– the level of Attenuation Compensation.

Table of results For one and the same fiber, the power meter displays a table of 9 results corresponding to the different possible wavelengths. The table shows the power measured in dBm, the relative power (in dB) and the reference level in dBm (if units = dB), together with the mode.

A measurement result is displayed in the table when the Keep Result softkey is pressed.

The Clear Table softkey orders deletion of all the results displayed in the table.

If the Alarm function has been activated, any result that exceeds the selected thresholds appears in red in the table. Otherwise, results are shown in the table in green.

210 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 11 OFI ModuleLTS function

When the instrument is switched off, results present in the table are saved.

Commands of the power meter parameters

When the LTS function is selected, the following softkeys are available on the results page:

<Set as reference> Selects the current result as reference value to measure the attenuation of a link. This reference is displayed under the measurement result until a new reference value is chosen.

<Zero> Adjustment of the Zero value when the power meter’s optical input is closed with a plug.

<Keep Result> Saves the result on the corresponding line of the table.

<Clear Table> Deletes all the results recorded in the table.

Making a measurement

The power meter is started up as soon as the LTS function is acti-vated in the SETUP menu.

Fig. 84 Results and commands of the LTS

Resultsof thepower meter

User Manual 780000102/12 211

Chapter 11 OFI ModuleLTS function

If the OFI module’s source is used, the START/STOP key must be used to start or stop emission of light.

Power measurement

– Connect the light source to be tested to the rear connector (see «Connections to the power meter and the source» page 206).

– In the SETUP menu, choose the units dBm, dB or Watts.– Press the START/STOP key to start the laser.

The result will appear in the results page and can be memorized in the table (see «Table of results» page 210).

– Press the START/STOP key to stop the laser.

Optical link loss Setting the zero value of the power meter

1 Fix the plug over the optical input of the power meter so that no light can reach the photodiode of the power meter. If the zero adjustment is made without this plug, an error message may be displayed, as the photodiode will detect too much light.

2 In the Results page, press the Zero soft key.

Carrying out the reference measurement1 Fix the adapter corresponding to the jumper to the optical connector

of the power meter.

2 Connect the jumper between the input of the power meter and the output of the source.

3 Configure the same wavelength on the source and the power meter.The power measured is displayed in the results page of the LTS.

4 Press the Set as Reference soft key to save the result displayed as reference value.

NOTEPower measurement is automatically updated in consequence. The value «<-60 dB» is displayed when the laser is switched off and if the source output is looped on to the power meter input.

It is important to set the zero of the power meter before making any measurements where accuracy is required, as the noise from the pho-todiode fluctuates over time and with variations in temperature.

212 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 11 OFI ModuleFOX Function

Measurements on the fiber under testAfter defining the reference value, proceed as follows to make the measurement:

1 Fix the jumpers and connectors needed to connect the fiber to be tested between the source output and the power meter input.

2 In the set-up menu, select dB units.

3 The power displayed in the Power Meter window corresponds to the optical loss of the link tested. It can be displayed in the table (see «Table of results» page 210).

FOX1 FunctionThe FOX function is used to make automatical, bidirectional optical power measurements and / or ORL measurements at one or several wavelengths.

This function is also used to make a distance measurement of the link under test.

Two Base Unit are required, each one equipped with an OFI module at each end of the fiber.

The OFI module 81xx is also compatible with the OFI-2000.

With the FOX function , the two Base Units can communicate and send messages to each other.

Configuration of the FOX automatic

measurement

Two types of parameters can be modified in the FOX configuration of the OFI.

– The Acquisition parameters– The results screen parameters.

1.Fiber Optic eXpert

User Manual 780000102/12 213

Chapter 11 OFI ModuleFOX Function

Acquisition parameters

– Laser All / 1550 / 1310 / 1625 / 1550 + 1310 / 1550 + 1625 / 1310 + 1625

– Measurements Loss / Loss + ORL / Loss + Length / Loss + ORL + Length

Results screen parameters

– Index Of Refraction– Preset index– 1550 SM

– Unit km / kfeet / miles

Fig. 85 FOX parameters

NOTEThe acquisition and measurement parameters can change according to the OFI plug-in used.

Preset Index 1550 SMUser from 1.30000 to 1.70000

Corning SMF-28 1.46810

Lucent Truewave 1.47320

SpecTran SM 1.46810

Litespec 1.46700

ATT SM 1.46700

Fitel Furukawa 1.47000

Corning SMF-DS 1.47110

Corning SMF-LS 1.47000

Corning Leaf 1.46840

E-SMF 1.46450

214 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 11 OFI ModuleFOX Function

– Alarms NoActive ; used to set alarms.

– Loss: enter the loss threshold for each wavelength (in dB).– ORL: enter an ORL threshold for each wavelength (in dB).– Delay: enter a delay time (in µs).– Length: indicative value, changes according to the delay time

and the fiber index.

To change the alarms values, use the direction keys and or the numeric keypad.

File Storage parameters

– Filenaming [Cable_Id][Fiber_Num][Fiber_Code]– Auto Store Yes (cannot be modified)– Fiber Nbr Increment Yes (cannot be modified)

In the FOX function:

– the measurement results are automatically saved– the fiber number is automatically incremented.

To display the fiber to be tested, push the START/STOP button in the results page of the FOX function (see «Choosing the fiber to be tested» page 221).

Establishing a reference

Before making a power, a ORL and / or distance measurement with the FOX function of the OFI module , you have to take references.

1 On the RESULTS page, push the References button.

Different references can be taken:

– For a loss measurement– Side by Side reference– Loopback reference

– For an ORL measurement– Power emitted reference– Zero ORL

NOTEAs the ORL is an option, establishing a reference for this measure-ment is not automatically available with the OFI module.

User Manual 780000102/12 215

Chapter 11 OFI ModuleFOX Function

Establishing a reference for

loss measurement

Before any measurement, you must establish references.

Two methods can be used to take references: taking a side by side refer-ence and taking the reference in a loop-back mode.

Taking a side by side reference

1 On the RESULTS page, push the References key.

2 Push the Loss Side/Side key.

3 Link the FOX connectors of the two Base Units by using two jumpers.

4 Push on Go key.

Once the references are taken, the reference screen is updated for the wavelengths available on the distant instrument. It indicates the type of reference used.The date of the reference as well as the type and serial number of the distant instrument are indicated on the first line of the table.

NOTEThis reference can only be performed when the two Base Unit are at the same location.

Fig. 86 Taking a side by side reference (8000 series example)

Reference date.Type and serial numberof the distant instrument

Go

216 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 11 OFI ModuleFOX Function

If the reference is correct, disconnect the jumpers at the middle point, in order to insert the fiber to be tested.

If the reference taken is not correct, take a new reference.

Taking the reference in a loop-

back mode

1 Connect the optical output of the source (FOX port) to the optical input of the power meter by means of a jumper.

2 Push the References key.

3 Push the Loss Loopback key.

4 Push the Go key.

If the reference measurements are too weak, a warning is displayed.

Clean all connections to improve the reference measurements.

The reference is only valid if the jumpers are not disconnected from the Base Unit.

NOTEThis reference can be made wether the Base Units are on the same site or not.

Fig. 87 Taking a reference in a loop-back mode

Go

User Manual 780000102/12 217

Chapter 11 OFI ModuleFOX Function

Once the reference is taken, the reference table is updated for the wavelengths available on the local instrument. It indicates the type of reference used.The date of the reference as well as the type and serial number of the local instrument are indicated on the first line of the table.

If the reference is correct, disconnect the jumper in order to connect the fiber to be tested.

If the reference is not correct, take a new reference.

Establishing a reference for an

ORL measurement

Two steps must be carried out to take a reference for a ORL measure-ment:

1 Power emitted reference

2 Zero ORL adjustment

ORL Emitted power

1 Link the FOX port to the power meter input port via a jumper.

2 Click on ORL Power Emitted

3 Click on the Go key.The power measurement from the laser signal emitted is completed.

Follow the order given above to take the reference. They are not two different processes but two steps necessary to establish a reference for an ORL measurement

NOTEAs ORL is an option, establishing a reference for this measurement is not automatically available with the OFI module.

218 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 11 OFI ModuleFOX Function

Once the reference has been taken, the reference screen is updated for the wavelengths available on the local instrument. It indicates the type of reference used.As the Zero mesurement as not yet been done, the first line of the table displays the message Ref ORL : Incomplete.

ORL Zero adjustment

Once the Power Emitted measurement has been carried out, the Zero adjustment can be performed:

1 Disconnect the jumper from the external power meter and wrap this jumper, still connected to the FOX port, around the mandrel (6 to 7 times).

2 Click on ORL Zero

3 Push the Go key

Fig. 88 Establishing a reference for an ORL measurement

Go

User Manual 780000102/12 219

Chapter 11 OFI ModuleFOX Function

Once the reference has been taken, the reference screen is updated for the wavelengths available on the local instrument. It indicates the type of reference used.

Measurement acquisition

Before making an automatic FOX measurement, check that:

– both Base Units (local and distant) as well as the OFI module on each instrument are powered on and the FOX function selected.

– the FOX function is correctly configured (SETUP menu).– each end of the fiber is correctly connected to the module.– the fiber and jumpers are in good condition.

To display the fiber measurement page, push the RESULTS key.

The page displays:

– Both instruments connected to the link (local and distant).– The Results table with the last measurement made.– The tested fiber parameters

Fig. 89 Adjustement of the ORL Zero

Go

Once the two references are complete, the date as well as the type and serial number of the local instrument are displayed on the first line of the table.

If not, the message Ref ORL : Incomplete is displayed.

220 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 11 OFI ModuleFOX Function

Choosing the fiber to be tested

Once the results page is displayed, push the START/STOP button.

The details of the next fiber to be tested are displayed.

To test a different fiber to the one displayed, select the new fiber according to its number or its color code.

Use the direction keys and to change the number or color code of the fiber to be tested.

Changing the fiber number involves a modification of the color code and vice versa.

Making the measurement

Before making the measurement, check that the reference measure-ments are correct (see «Establishing a reference» page 215).

Push the START/STOP button once more to start the measurement of the selected fiber.

The results are displayed as the sequence progresses, on both Base Units. During the measurement, the soft keys on the right of the screen are inactive.

Once the measurement has finished, the Base Unit beeps to signal the end of the sequence. The beep differs, depending on wether the measurement has completed correctly or according to the measurement/alarm status.

Identifying the distant module

Before making a measurement, you can check presence of the distant module.

Once the results page is displayed, click on Identify distant.

The distant module identification is made automatically.

Fig. 90 Details of the following fiber to be tested

User Manual 780000102/12 221

Chapter 11 OFI ModuleFOX Function

Data from the distant instrument is displayed: The serial number and the operator name on this instrument.

Check this data before making a measurement or taking a reference.

Displaying results for a

FOX automatic measurement

The measurement results are displayed as the sequence progresses, on both Base Units.

During the measurement, the following icon is displayed and the keys on the right of the screen are inactive.

Once the measurement has finished:

– the icon turns grey– keys are active.– the Base Unit beeps to signal the end of the measurement.

Fig. 91 Distant module Identification

Distant Module

222 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 11 OFI ModuleFOX Function

The data displayed in the table can vary according to the acquisiton parameters (see «Configuration of the FOX automatic measurement» page 213).

Sending a message

When two Base Units are connected at each end of the fiber, via their FOX port, they can send messages to each other.

Two types of messages are available:

– predefined messages (10)– User-definable messages(4)

The message sent by one Base Unit will be displayed on the screen of the other Base Unit.

To send a message to the distant Base Unit:

In the Results page, push the Send Message key.

Fig. 92 Result of a FOX automatic measurement

User Manual 780000102/12 223

Chapter 11 OFI ModuleFOX Function

A menu with the 14 messages available is displayed.

Select the message to be sent using the direction keys and .

To enter a user message, select one of the last 4 messages (called User message 1 / 2 / 3 / 4) and push the direction key .

The edition keypad is displayed.

Enter the text you want and push the Valid key on the keypad or on the screen.

Push the Send Message or Select key.

On the distant Base Unit, the message is displayed with the icon .

Press any key to delete the message.

Fig. 93 Messages that can be sent to the distant Base Unit

NOTEIf the link is not established between the two Base Unit, the following error message is displayed: «No acknowledge received for the SMS sent».

224 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 11 OFI ModuleManual ORL

Manual ORL The OFI module can be equipped with the ORL function (option), which allows to make an ORL manual measurement .

However, before making this measurement, the references have to be established once the ORL tab has been selected on the OFI module or on the Base Unit, in the SYSTEM page.

Establishing a reference for an

ORL manual measurement

Two steps must be carried out to take a reference for an ORL manual measurement:

1 Power emitted reference: see «ORL Emitted power» page 218

2 Zero ORL adjustment: see «ORL Zero adjustment» page 219

Fig. 94 Selection of the ORL function

The functions LTS, FOX and ORL can be selected at the same time on the OFI module.

However, the LTS and ORL functions from the Base Unit cannot be selected simultaneously.

Follow the order given above to take the reference. They are not two different processes but two steps necessary to establish a reference for an ORL manual measurement

Establishing references is only valid for a specific module or function. For example, the references for an ORL automatic measurement are only available for the FOX function (a new reference must be redone for an ORL manual measurement.).

Moreover, the Manual ORL references made with the Base Unit are not valid with an OFI module.

User Manual 780000102/12 225

Chapter 11 OFI ModuleManual ORL

Measurement acquisition

The page displays:

– The results screen with the wavelength and the ORL references established.

– The table where are saved the ORL measurements.

Making the measurement

Before making the measurement, check that the reference measure-ments are correct (see «Establishing a reference for an ORL manual measurement» page 225).

Push the START/STOP key to start the measurement.

Display of results for an ORL manual

measurement

To display the fiber measurement page, push the RESULTS key.

For each wavelength, push the key Keep Result to display the result in the table.

The Clear Table softkey orders deletion of all the results displayed in the table.

If the Alarm function has been activated, any result that exceeds the selected thresholds appears in red in the table.

NOTEAs ORL manual is an option, establishing a reference for this mea-surement is not automatically available with the OFI module.

226 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 11 OFI ModuleFile Management

Once all the results are displayed, click on the FILE button to save the file in a directory.

File Management

Storing results Although each measurement is automatically stored (for FOX results only), it is possible to save the results under a different file name, direc-tory etc.

Once the results are displayed:

1 Push the FILE button

2 Select Setup with the key Setup/Explorer

3 Modify the parameter you want in the FILE configuration menu

4 Click on the Store Trace key

The FOX files are saved with the extension «.FOX». The LTS files are saved with the extension «.LTS». The ORL files are saved with the extension «.ORL»

Fig. 95 Results for an ORL manual measurement

User Manual 780000102/12 227

Chapter 11 OFI ModuleFile Management

For more details on file management, see «File management» page 241.

Recalling files To recall a LTS, FOX or ORL file:

1 Go to the Explorer

2 Select the directory

3 Select the file to load

4 Click on Load

5 Click on View Trace(s) or Load Trace + Config..The selected file is opened

With the LTS and ORL results, two files are saved :The first file is to be used with the Base Unit and allows all LTS mea-surements results to be retrieved. It is saved with the extension «.LTS» or «.ORL».

The second file is an ASCII file using tabulations to separate values. It is saved with the extension «.txt» and cannot be opened by the Base Unit. It has been designed to be used with a spreadsheet program on a PC where it allows all LTS measurement results to be retrieved and formatted in a customized table.

228 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 12 Multi Test Access Unit

12

This chapter describes the function of the MTAU (Multi Test Access Unit) module and its use.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

– «Function of the MTAU module» on page 230– «Connections» on page 230– «Configuration» on page 231– «Manual mode» on page 231– «Auto mode» on page 232– «Use of the script (specific client option)» on page 235

The main application of this module is to be used together with the 8000 platform.

User Manual 780000102/12 229

Chapter 12 Multi Test Access UnitFunction of the MTAU module

Function of the MTAU moduleThe MTAU is a passive module (switch) used to route the signals from the different measurement plug-ins to one and the same fiber.

The advantage is to be able, for example, to make all the characterization measurements (insertion loss, reflectometry, chromatic dispersion, spec-trum and polarization measurements) with a single Base Unit1 without ever disconnecting the fiber.

ConnectionsThe MTAU plug-ins offer a common port with 4 ports A, B,C and D.

The fiber to be tested must be connected to the common port .

The other ports are connected to the measurement plug-ins, e.g. OTDR, CD, OSA, PMD, or an external instrument.

Two Base Units can be used at each end of the link under test for maximum efficiency and to carry out the largest number of tests in both directions.

1.Equipped with suitable plug-ins, for example an OTDR/CD plug-in and a WDM/PMD plug-in.

NOTEThe MTAU is not directional. It is possible to use the common port either as an input or as an output.

Fig. 96 MTAU plug-in with 1 common & 4 ports

Inputs for connection to the different plug-ins

Output: fiber under test

230 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 12 Multi Test Access UnitConfiguration

ConfigurationTo use the MTAU function, go into the SYSTEM menu and select the icon

using the key .

Then go into the SETUP or RESULTS menu (the same page is displayed for this plug-in) to access the screen from which the the input channels can be switched.

The screen displays a diagram of the input and outputs to the switching device.

Manual modeTo switch each output, use the button Port A/Port B/Port C/Port D. Each click on this button switches the next output port.

The active port and the link to the common port are shown green, while the other ports remain grey.

Fig. 97 Manual mode for the MTAU plug-in

Common port

Port A

Port B

Port C

Port D

Switching button

NOTETo optimize manipulation, always use the RESULTS key to change over from this screen to the screen corresponding to each measure-ment.

User Manual 780000102/12 231

Chapter 12 Multi Test Access UnitAuto mode

n d

Auto modeThe auto mode offers the best way to test a full cable. The purpose is to set a sequence of operations, which will be performed for each fiber, one after the other with no need to modify the configuration or to go to each measurement tab. All operations can be handled from the MTAU tab.

Select Auto on the key Manual/Auto to switch to auto mode or vice et versa.

Different icons appear at the top of the screen, showing different avail-able functions. According to your Base Unit configuration, you may have all the following functions available :

– OTDR– PMD– CD– AP– OSA

NOTEThe switch between measurement (if necessary) is automatic. Never-theless launching each measurement remains the user responsibility, as some extra equipment might be needed (ex broadband source for PMD).

Fig. 98 Auto mode for the MTAU plug-in

Icons representing available functions Links showing

that OTDR will be performed oport A, PMD anAP on port C

232 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 12 Multi Test Access UnitAuto mode

Configuration of the sequence

of tests

1 Make sure you select all necessary functions in the SETUP menu.

2 Go to each tab if necessary to make sure all setup values are correct for each selected function.

3 Select the Function Cursor key, and choose which function you wish to configure in the list of icons.

4 Select the Port Cursor key, and choose which port is connected to the corresponding function.

5 Click on the key to validate the association. A solid link will be drawn between the function and the port you selected (see the figure «Auto mode for the MTAU plug-in» on page 232).

6 Go back to step ’3’ for the next function if necessary.

When the sequence is completely configured, you can view which func-tion is connected to which port thanks to all the solid links (see the figure «Auto mode for the MTAU plug-in» on page 232).

Various link colors are offered to differentiate each port :

– light blue for port A– red for port B– pink for port C– dark blue for port D

NOTEIcons for selected functions appear in yellow, icons for available but unselected functions appear in grey.

NOTEIt is not possible to affect the same function to different ports.

NOTEFunctions that are offered by the same physical module may only be connected to the same port.

User Manual 780000102/12 233

Chapter 12 Multi Test Access UnitAuto mode

Performing the sequence of

tests

1 Connect the fiber to test to the MTAU common port.

2 Click on START/STOP to start the sequence.

3 A message is displayed requesting to confirm you wish to start the measurement, such as «Start SM-OTDR measurement ?». Answering No cancels all the sequence but keeps the configuration in memory.Answering Yes starts the first measurement.

4 After each measurement is done, a new message follows if another measurement is configured in the sequence such as in step 3

5 The sequence is terminated when no more message is displayed and the led from the MTAU tab changes from . to . Go back to step ’1’ with a new fiber.

The order of the sequence will take in consideration the order in which the sequence is displayed on screen, starting with the ports order, then with the functions order. In our example, the sequence will measure successively OTDR, OSA then PMD.

Some messages may appear during the sequence to request specific actions necessary for the measurement (just like «check source» appears before a PMD measurement).

The focus is on the active function and the link becomes green.

Even though this is not necessary, it is possible to go to the measurement corresponding tab when a function is being used, and see the results of the acquisition.

IMPORTANTIf a function used in the sequence configuration is deselected in the SYSTEM page, the configuration automatically deletes the corre-sponding link but keeps the rest of the configuration in memory. Rese-lecting the function does not automatically recreate the link.

NOTEThe last configuration is saved in the Base Unit and may be retrieved after a complete reboot, unless the hardware configuration has changed (for example if a new module is inserted).

234 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 12 Multi Test Access UnitUse of the script (specific client option)

if you wish to stop a measurement but not the sequence, go to the corre-sponding measurement tab and click on START/STOP.

Use of the script (specific client option)

Two specific scripts have been performed for two specific clients: Verizon and Bellsouth.

Those scripts are always used with the MTAU module. The aim is to make sequences of test one after the other according to the modules set into the 8000 Base-Unit.

1 Push the SCRIPT key to access the menu

2 Select the script to be played, using direction keys.

3 Click on LEARN

The application page is displayed.

If a function is deselected in the SETUP page while the sequence is launched, the sequence is automatically updated and continues if the function was not currently used, or is immediately stopped otherwise. In this last case, an error message is displayed indicating that the function has been deselected.

To use the Script function, external keyboard and mouse are mandatory (see «Using an external keyboard, mouse and screen touch (options)» on page 35).

Fig. 99 Page Script

User Manual 780000102/12 235

Chapter 12 Multi Test Access UnitUse of the script (specific client option)

4 Fill the available fields, using the external keyboard and mouse.

5 Once the application is validated, the test sequence is automatically launched.

Fig. 100 Exemple d’application (Verizon)

236 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 13 Broadband source BBS

13

This chapter describes the function of the BBS (Broadband Source) module and its use.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

– “Function of the BBS module” on page 238– “Activation process” on page 238– “Remote interlock connector” on page 240

User Manual 780000102/12 237

Chapter 13 Broadband source BBSFunction of the BBS module

Function of the BBS moduleThe BBS is a broadband source, covering several wavelength ranges (from 1260 to 1640 nm with the BBS2A). It is used to measure the atten-uation profiles, the chromaticn dispersion and the PMD of optical fibers (with a connection to an ODM module).

Activation processTo use the BBS function, go into the SYSTEM menu and select the BBS icon using the key .

Then go into the SETUP or RESULTS menu (the same page is displayed for this plug-in) to access the screen of the BBS module.

1 Press the SOURCE ON key.

2 Entrer the password 4877, using the direction keys .

3 Press the CONFIRM button to valid the password.

The laser is on and the screen displays the icon

4 Press the SOURCE OFF / ON key to activate the laser.

Fig. 101 Validate the password

Password4877

Valid

238 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 13 Broadband source BBSActivation process

5 Select the type of measurement to be performed with the BBS Module: CD, PMD or AP.

6 Make the connections of the BBS with the module.

The BBS is ready for a CD, AP or PMD measurement. See Chapter 7 on page 129, Chapter 8 on page 149 and Chapter 10 on page 187 to configure and perform the measurement.

NOTETo lock the instrument, simply un-select the BBS module. Any user coming next will be prompted for a password when the module will be re-selected.

After powering down the unit, you will also be prompted for the pass-word.

Fig. 102 Configuration of the E81BBS1A & E81BBS2A

Fig. 103 Example of the BBS connection with a CD Module

Fiber under test

JumperJumper

BBS

Signal input socket on the ODM plug-in

User Manual 780000102/12 239

Chapter 13 Broadband source BBSRemote interlock connector

Remote interlock connectorThe BBS module has been equipped with a remote interlock connector (SMB type) on its front pannel. This is to protect the user from injury when using class IIIb light sources.

The use of a Remote Interlock system is specified with class IIIb sources by 21 CFR 1040.10 (USA).

If the short circuit at the SMB connector is opened, the broadband light source is switched off immediately and cannot be switched on until it is closed again.

NOTENote that the BBS modules are of class 1M under the IEC 60825-1: 2001 international standard.

Fig. 104 Remote interlock connector

Remote interlock connector

240 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 14 File management

14

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

– “File configuration menu” on page 242– “Explorer Function” on page 252– “Link Manager Function” on page 261– “CD-Rom burning (MTS / T-BERD 8000 only)” on page 264

Without any module into the MTS / T-BERD, the files cannot be loaded and traces cannot be displayed or saved (see User Manual of the 8000 / 6000 Platform).

User Manual 780000102/12 241

Chapter 14 File managementFile configuration menu

File configuration menu

This menu is used to configure various parameters common to the whole of a cable.

– Press the FILE button. The following File menu appears.

Managing tabs Tabs give access to the File menu of each application (OTDR, OSA, Power Meter, etc.) present in the modules and plug-ins of the instrument.

It is possible to open a file even if the corresponding plug-in is not present in the instrument (e.g. OSA file without OSA plug-in). A new tab then temporarily manages this application.

When several different applications (corresponding to modules or plug-ins for different measurements) are managed by the Base Unit, pressing the FILE key several times in succession changes from one tab to another to give access to the file configuration of the desired application (e.g. OTDR, OSA, etc.). See «Tabs» on page 33.

Fig. 105 File Menu (example with OTDR plug-in)

242 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 14 File managementFile configuration menu

File signature The acquisition parameters of the trace contained in the selected file are displayed at the top of the screen together with a small-scale represen-tation of the trace (provided it was acquired on a MTS / T-BERD Base Unit) (see «Mini-trace» on page 33).

File information

Current directory The Dir. line of the menu shows the directory in which the traces will be stored.

This line can also be used to change the active storage medium direc-tory. To do this, launch the directory editor by means of the key: .

The directory edited must exist, otherwise it will not be taken into account. Change of medium and the creation and/or dele-tion of directories can only be done through the file explorer or link manager (see «Explorer Function» on page 252 or «Link Manager Function» on page 261)

Fig. 106 Example of signature of an OTDR file (in the File Menu)

Plug-in used Resolution

Laser Refraction index

Name of the file

Acquisition time

Mini-trace

Cable end info:

CommentDirection of

Date of the acquisition of Extremity info

Pulse width

Cable Id, Fiber Id, Fiber Code

measurement

the signal

When recalling a trace, fiber parameters are shown in the signature, but not necessarily in the FILE menu. The FILE menu is used to edit parameters for the current or next acquisition, or to modify the signa-ture of a stored trace only.

User Manual 780000102/12 243

Chapter 14 File managementFile configuration menu

Rules for naming files

In the name of the file, it is possible to program automatic inclusion of parameters such as the name of the fiber, fiber code, identifiers (of the cable, its origin, its end) or the measurement parameters (direction, reso-lution, wavelength, pulse length).

The <Filenaming> line shows the current filenaming rules and can be used to modify them.

To edit or modify these rules:

1 Go to to the Filenaming line

2 Press to call up the edit menu

3 Move around in the edit screen using the direction keys

4 Select the desired characters and parameters

5 Confirm each parameter or character selected by clicking on

6 Select Validate or Cancel to quit the edit screen (according to whether the modifications are to be applied or not).

The key DEFAULT FILENAME is displayed when the line Filenaming is selected, and allows to apply the file default name to the trace opened.

Example of filenaming:

Fig. 107 Editing filenaming parameters

File parameters Filenaming rules selected Filename obtained

Resolution = 16 cm Fiber number = 1

ABC[Resolution]Fiber_[Fiber_Code] ABC16_cmFiber_1

244 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 14 File managementFile configuration menu

Name of a file After an acquisition, and as long as the result has not been saved, the line below Filenaming gives the name made up in accordance with the filenaming rules.

If the file has been recalled from a memory, the line below Filenaming shows its name irrespective of whether it respects the current filenaming rules.

This name can then be modified by calling up the edit menu using the button . If a modification is then made to the filenaming rules, the file name will not be modified. To return to a name made up in accordance with the filenaming rules, simply delete the existing name.

Auto store If this option is validated, the trace or traces resulting from each acquisi-tion are automatically saved according to the filenaming rules.

Fiber Description

This paragraph gives the fiber information for the extremity defined in Direction. If the direction is O->E, then the fiber information concerns the origin. If the direction is E->O, it concerns the extremity.

A file name can consist of up to 40 characters. However, beyond a certain length, the names will be truncated in the display on the Base Unit, the end being replaced by «…».

Editing the name enables the trace to be saved in a new file (with a new name), but it cannot rename the existing file (this function is pos-sible in the Explorer menu — see «Storage media» on page 253). Thus the new name will not be taken into account until the trace is saved again.

NOTEThe information entered in the Fiber information window concerns the editing and/or modifications of the cable and fiber parameters. When a trace is recalled without recalling its configuration, the parameters of this trace will be present only in its signature.

User Manual 780000102/12 245

Chapter 14 File managementFile configuration menu

Fiber ID and Fiber Number

The Fiber Id menu consists of an alphanumerical part entered by means of the edit menu, followed by the fiber number. This number is automati-cally incremented or decremented as a function of the fiber code.

Color code The color code corresponds either to the fiber number, or to a color code, according to the choice made in Cable structure> Color Coding.

If a color code is selected, it can consist of the codes for the tube, the ribbon and the fiber itself. Its composition is defined in Cable Structure> Cable Content.

Fiber Nbr Increment

In Fiber Nbr Increment mode, the fiber code is automatically incre-mented at each new file-save.

Incrementation is done as a function of:

– the max. number of fibers, tubes and ribbons defined in Cable Structure (Max Tubes, Max Ribbon, Max Fibers)

– the composition of the color code, always incrementing first the fiber number, then the ribbon number, then (if applicable) the tube number

– the choices made, for each color code, in Cable Structure (Tube Coding, Ribbon Coding, Fiber Coding) and in Code Defi-nition (see «Cable structure» on page 248).

The fiber number may be incremented or decremented directly with keys and . or using the numeric keypad

NOTEThe Fiber Code and the fiber number concatenated with Fiber Name are interdependent: they are incremented or decremented at the same time. However, the fiber number remains a number only, while the fiber code is alphanumerical. Whether it includes a color code or not (see «Cable structure» on page 248), it may be composed of one, two or three parts (see figure page 247).

246 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 14 File managementFile configuration menu

Fig. 108 Example of incrementation of fiber code

Link description

The information entered in the Link Description window concerns the editing and/or the modifications of the cable and fiber parameters. When a trace is recalled without recall of the configuration, the parameters of this trace will be present only in its signature.

Extremities are different

In some cases, it is interesting to save different information for the origin and the extremity of the cable.

If this option is validated, it is possible, after selecting the extremity to be edited in the Cable Structure menu, to modify the values specific to the cable (cable name, color coding, content of the coding), for each of these extremities. See chapter «Cable structure» on page 248)

To display/modify the data specific to the fiber (name and code), it is necessary to change direction temporarily. In the «O->E» direction, the information on the origin can be edited, and in the «E->O» direction, that on the extremity.

Cable Id This parameter allows to enter an idnetification of the cable, using the Edition menu.

Fiber and cable parameters used in the example:

Fiber Name: ’Fiberx’ Cable Content: ’Tube/Fiber’ Max Tube: 12 Max Fiber: 24 Coding used for the fiber and the tube: TIA

Fiber N Fiber N+1

Color Code Yes No Yes No

<Fiber Name> Fiberx24 Fiberx24 Fiberx25 Fiberx25

<Fiber Code> Bl/Aq- 1/24 Gold/Bl 2/1

User Manual 780000102/12 247

Chapter 14 File managementFile configuration menu

Direction The direction shows if the acquisition has been made from the origin to the extremity (O->E) or from the extremity to the origin (E->O). Changing direction makes it possible, when different extremities are handled, to see the parameters of the fiber for the other extremity.

Origin The name of the origin of the link may be entered here.

End Location The name of the extremity of the link may be entered here.

Cable structure This line opens a sub-menu, all the parameters of which can be different for each extremity.

Color Coding Choice of whether or not to apply a color coding to the fiber. This choice is made at link level, as all the fibers of a given link, for a given extremity, will be coded the same way. This choice modifies the result of the <Fiber Code> line. See «Fiber Nbr Increment» on page 246.

Fig. 109 Cable structure menu

NOTEThe Cable Structure window is specific to an extremity. Each struc-ture keeps its own parameters by default. Modifications made to the one are not automatically applied to the other. Thus, after the values relating to the origin have been modified, it is normal not to find these same values entered for the extremity.

248 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 14 File managementFile configuration menu

Cable content Shows how the color code is to be used (see figure «Cable structure menu» on page 248):

–<Fiber> : Only the color code of the fiber is proposed (example: ’Gold’)

–<Ribbon/Fiber>: The color code of the fiber is preceded by that of the ribbon, and separated by a ’/’ (example: ’Bl/Or’)

–<Tube/Fiber>: The color code of the fiber is preceded by that of the tube, and separated by a ’/’ (example: ’Br/Or’)

–<Tube/Ribbon/Fiber>:The color code of the fiber is preceded by that of the tube, then by that of the ribbon; the three being separated by a ’/’ (example: ’Br/Bl/Or’). See «Fiber Nbr Increment» on page 246.

Max tube Shows the maximum number of tubes in the cable for the extremity selected. This information influences the automatic coding of the fiber. See «Fiber Nbr Increment» on page 246.

Max ribbon Shows the maximum number of ribbons in the cable for the extremity selected. This information influences the automatic coding of the fiber. See «Fiber Nbr Increment» on page 246

Max fiber Shows the maximum number of fibers in the cable for the extremity selected. This information influences the automatic coding of the fiber. See «Fiber Nbr Increment» on page 246

Tube Coding, Ribbon Coding, Fiber CodingThe lines Tube Coding, Ribbon Coding and Fiber Coding enable selection of the color coding of the tube, the ribbon and the fiber from 5 different codes described below: TIA, USER 1, USER 2, USER 3 and USER 4.

Code Definition The Code Definition line opens a sub-menu, with which the different color codes possible on the

NOTECertain parameters are not valid in the configuration selected. Thus, if no tube is selected in Cable Content, all the lines relating to the tube concept will be deactivated (grayed out in the menu).

User Manual 780000102/12 249

Chapter 14 File managementFile configuration menu

instrument can be displayed and modified (see figure «Color code definition» on page 250).

Five different codes can be managed by the Base Unit, including a stan-dard code.

The standard code (TIA) may be displayed but it cannot be modified.

The other codes, called by default USER1, USER2, USER3 and USER4, can be entirely personalized.

–Edited code selects the code for display or modifica-tion.

–Copy name to give a new name to the code selected, press the key, which calls up the edit menu.

–View codes displays the color codes 1 to 12 or 13 to 24.

–Code 1..23 Use the arrow to modify the codes if necessary.

Operator Use the arrow to enter the name of the operator carrying out the measurement.

Fig. 110 Color code definition

250 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 14 File managementFile configuration menu

Comment In contrast to the other data in this menu, the comment is specific to a fiber, and not to the whole cable. This line is thus used to enter a new comment and not to display it. The comment appears at the top of the screen, with the other parameters of the fiber (see figure «Example of signature of an OTDR file (in the File Menu)» on page 243). This comment will remain available for the next acquisition, unless it is deleted.

File expedition This sub-menu appears when the option <mail> has been configured with one media, for example Ethernet, in the system setup menu (see the base manual of the Base Unit, reference 8000M02 for example.)

To send a mail, you must have filled the 2 following fields :

<Mail to> Use the arrow key to enter in the edition window, and enter the name of the recipient.

<Subject> Using the same key, enter the subject of the mail or a comment if necessary.

Buttons on the right of the

screen

Saving traces

These buttons are used to save one or more traces/

– Store Trace: allows to save the current trace opened.– Store all Traces: allows to store all the traces displayed in overlay

(OTDR and OSA only) in one single file.

The softkey Next Trace is used to activate the menu of the following trace, in an overlay configuration (OTDR and OSA only).

Fig. 111 Save

User Manual 780000102/12 251

Chapter 14 File managementExplorer Function

To copy the configuration on to all the tabs <Copy Setup for all>

The button Copy Setup For all applies the configuration modifications made in the File menu displayed into the File menus of the other appli-cations managed by the base (appearing in the other tabs).

Explorer Function

To access the Explorer function, after pressing the FILE button, press the Setup/Explorer key.

Description of the explorer

The explorer is used to select the storage medium, and to create or rename directories and files:

– The left-hand part presents the storage architecture. Use the keys and to move around among all the media and their respective directories.

– The right-hand part displays all the files present in the directory selected.

NOTEIf you want to store traces on CD-ROM and if no CD is set into the MTS / T-BERD 8000, or if the CD is write protected, then the following message is displayed: Selected Storage device not pres-ent or write protected. Please select another device.

Fig. 112 Copy Setup For All

Fig. 113 Setup / Explorer

252 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 14 File managementExplorer Function

The direction keys can be used to move horizontally between the two parts and vertically within each zone.

At the top of the screen, the file signature selected is repeated (see «Example of signature of an OTDR file (in the File Menu)» on page 243).

Storage media For saving or recalling data, the Base Unit offers a wide choice of media, both built-in and external.

Free space on selected media is clearly displayed at the bottom of the left panel.

Storage media built into the Base

Unit

– An internal memory – A hard disk (or high capacity storage), on option. If this option is

selected, then the hard disk replaces the internal memory.– A 3 1/2 in. floppy disk drive, on option (8000 platform only)– A CD-RW drive, on option (8000 platform only)

Fig. 114 Example of explorer

Free space available on the selected media

User Manual 780000102/12 253

Chapter 14 File managementExplorer Function

External USB storage media

The Base Unit is equipped with 2 USB ports as standard. One of these can be used to connect an external storage medium, in particular a USB memory key.

Standard Compact Flash card (8000

platform only)

The Base Unit is equipped as standard with a slot in which a Compact Flash card can be inserted.

NOTEIt is possible to disconnect/reconnect this medium while the instru-ment is switched on. Nevertheless, it is recommended to remove the cursor from the <USBFlash> media in the explorer before removing the key. This will ensure that no data is still currently being trans-ferred.

When a file is moved in the explorer of the Base Unit, the end of the move on the screen does not mean that writing of data into the mem-ory is complete. The transcription of some data may still be incom-plete if the storage unit is removed prematurely.

NOTEA beep is emitted by the Base Unit to confirm the successful insertion and recognition of a USB memory key.

NOTEUSB memory keys can be very different.They differ on Hw and Sw aspects, even inside a given brand.

In particular, USB memory keys targeting audio recording are often formatted in very specific ways and the format is often very different from a standard FAT.

For all these reasons, we advise users to use memory Keys provided by JDSU.

In any case, USB memory keys which are recognized by the MTS (a beep is generated when plugged on the MTS) but which cannot be read or written, should be formatted on the MTS with the Usbflash Format utility in Expert tools > Media utilities.

If a problem occurs with the USB key you are using, contact your Local Technical Assistance Center.

254 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 14 File managementExplorer Function

Remote Base Unitand data transfer

During a data transfer (with the option Data/Talkset), the distant Base Unit hard drive connected by the fiber is displayed as a storage media. File and directory edition features may all be used in the same manner with this storage media as with the other ones.

Abbreviations for storage media

The abbreviations used in the explorer for the different storage media are:

The Compact Flash card must be inserted before switching on the instrument. It is strongly recommended that this medium should not be withdrawn or reinserted while the instrument is switched on.

Abbreviation Storage medium

harddisk Hard disk

disk Internal flash memory (if no hard disk)

floppy Floppy disk1

1. Only with MTS/T-BERD 8000

cdrom CD-ROM2

2. Only with MTS/T-BERD 8000

usbflash USB memory key

cflash Compact Flash memory card

masterdisk Hard drive from the remote Base Unit which initiated the connection

slavedisk Hard drive from the remote Base Unit which accepted the connection

Remote hard drives are seen with different names, according to which one has initiated the connection. Nevertheless, possible actions on these disks are all the same. There are no master/slave relations for data exchange.

User Manual 780000102/12 255

Chapter 14 File managementExplorer Function

Directory edit function

The editing functions are similar to those of other explorers. The directo-ries are at the top left of the screen. If the cursor is in this part, the func-tions proposed by the keys are specific to the management of the directories.

Selection of directories

If the cursor is in the left-hand part of the screen:

– the direction keys can be used to select a directory. – the key opens the directory selected and closes it when

pressed a second time.

Edition of directories

When a directory is selected, the keys offer the following functions:

<Create Directory> Creation of a new directory. An editor enables entry of its name.

<Rename Dir.> Renames the directory selected. An editor enables replacement of its current name.

<Edit> Opens a new menu providing functions for editing the directories: Copy, Cut, Paste, Delete and Merge.

Do not confuse «Selected» with «Active». A directory may be displayed in video inverse, to show that it is the current working directory. If it does not have a broken red line round it, it is not active.

Fig. 115 Selected / Active File

Active: working directory Selected: the cursor is hereBroken red line around

NOTEA whole directory with its contents can be copied into another direc-tory or on to another storage medium.

256 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 14 File managementExplorer Function

File editing function

The right-hand part of the screen can be used to work on the files in the directory selected.

A table gives the list of the files in the directory, showing for each one: its name, size, type and date of creation.

For files recognized by the Base Unit, the types are symbolized by icons. E.g.

. OSA file (.OSA extension)

OTDR file (.SOR extension)

OEO file (.OEO extension)

PMD file (.PMD extension)

CD OTDR file (.CD extension)

AP file (.AP extension)

LTS file (.LTS extension)

ORL file (.ORL extension)

CD ODM file (.OCD extension)

Format of files OTDR files that can be read by the Base Unit are type Bellcore 1.0, 1.1 and 2.0.

Other files that can be read by the Base Unit are specific to this instru-ment.

To read other formats, use JDSU’s FiberTrace or FiberCable software.

Easy file selection The direction keys are used to position the cursor on the file to be selected.

Multiple selection of files

It is possible to select several files simultaneously to move them, delete, print, or copy them on to another medium or to display the corresponding traces in overlay (see «Display of several traces in overlay» on page 261).

User Manual 780000102/12 257

Chapter 14 File managementExplorer Function

To do this, press after each selection. The files selected appear in video inverse. To deselect a file, place the cursor on the name of the file and press the key again.

Commands relating to files

When a file is selected, the keys offer the following functions:

<Load> Opens the sub-menu for display of traces. See chapter «Loading files and displaying traces» on page 260

<Select all> Direct selection of all the files in the directory. After this key has been pressed, its name changes to <Deselect All> so that the operation can be cancelled if necessary.

<Edit> Displays a sub-menu to copy, cut, paste, delete, rename or merge one or more files.

Using the Merge key, with the txt files.When saving a Manual ORL or LTS measurement result, in addition to the .LTS and .ORL file, a txt file is automatically saved for each measure-ment type ’(see “File Management” > «Storing results» on page 227).

The key Merge is used to merge several txt files from Manual ORL and LTS measurements into one txt file, putting together the results of both measurement types.

– In the explorer, select the txt files generated with the LTS and Manual ORL measurements you want.

– Click on Merge keyThe file merged_files.txt is automatically saved in the same directory as the one where the ORL and LTS txt files have been selected.

NOTEIf a mouse is used, click on a file to select it, and click again to dese-lect it.

If no file has been selected by the key, the file where the cursor is positioned is taken as selected.

On the other hand, if a file has been selected with the key, and the cursor is on another file, the latter is not selected!

258 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 14 File managementExplorer Function

<Sort> Opens a sub-menu with which the files in the directory can be sorted by name, size, type or date.

<Send by mail> This option appears if <Mail> has been defined with a media in the system setup menu. The subject and the recipient of the mail are those set in the file setup menu (see «File expedition» on page 251). Comments may be added. This option allows to send files by e-mail. After a few seconds, a message is displayed to inform the user that the mail has been sent successfully.

Saving Files from the Explorer

When the explorer is displayed, the active trace for the selected tab is displayed in the File Signature.

You can then save the active trace:

1 Select a directory by clicking once on it

2 Click on Store to save the active trace or Click on Next Trace to change the file signature on the top part of the screen and to save the next trace from traces in overlay

3 Click on Save.

4 If you wish, click on FILE button to display the Explorer page for another application and save, using the same method, the active trace from this application.

NOTEThe file merged_files.txt can be renamed once it is saved.

User Manual 780000102/12 259

Chapter 14 File managementExplorer Function

This will open automatically the edition keypad, in order to give a filename for the active trace.

Loading files and displaying

traces

To access the functions for loading one or more files, select the file(s) in the explorer and press Load. Several options are then available:

Simple loading The key View Trace(s) enables simple loading of traces, using the current parameters of the Base Unit. The current trace is then replaced with this new trace.

Load with configuration

The key Load Trace+Config will display the traces, recalling the config-uration recorded in the file. Thus the zooms, cursors and parameters present at the time of acquisition will be used for the display.

This function also enables to recall and set the parameters defined in the screens corresponding respectively to the FILE and SETUP keys.

It is then possible to perform an acquisition under the same conditions as those of the trace recalled.

– If the Base Unit was equipped with a different module from the

Fig. 116 Saving active trace from the explorer

The trace dexcribed in the file signature will be saved

in the directory selected(in this example:Demo Curves)

Displayed when two active overlaid traces are open.

260 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 14 File managementLink Manager Function

current one when the trace was acquired, then certain configu-ration parameters cannot be updated. A message then warns the user of this.

– If several traces are selected, the configuration used will be that of the first trace.

– If the number of traces added and the number of traces present is greater than 8, then the last traces added will not all be taken into account.

Load Trace + Info (with OTDR files

only)

The OTDR traces can also be loaded without the parameters defined in the screen displayed via the SETUP key.

The key LOAD TRACE + INFO will then display the OTDR traces, recalling exclusively the File information, such as the fiber name and number, direction, extremities etc. See Figure 105 on page 242.

Display of several traces in overlay

Up to 8 traces in the same application (OTDR, OSA, etc.) can be displayed simultaneously in overlay.

To obtain a display of multiple traces, two methods are possible:

– Select all the files to be loaded at the same time (see chapter «Multiple selection of files» on page 257)

– Add a trace at the same interval as those already displayed by means of the Add Trace(s) key.

Link Manager FunctionThe Link Manager function is available using the FIBER INFO. key and allows to display the explorer with all the link information for the active application.

Click as many times as necessary on the key MENU / EXPLORER / FIBER INFO. to select FIBER INFO. and display the corresponding files for the active tab.

The configuration cannot be recalled if the trace was not originally created by a Base Unit.

User Manual 780000102/12 261

Chapter 14 File managementLink Manager Function

For exemple, if the Fiber Info. function is selected in the tab OTDR, only the link information from the OTDR files will be displayed (wether in multi-mode or singlemode).

According to the application selected, the fiber information available are different. The table below describes the fiber information displayed for each selected tab:

NOTEThe Fiber Info. function is only available with the OTDR, CD, OSA, PMD, AP and FOX functions.

Fig. 117 Fiber Info. function (with OTDR files only)

Tabselected

Table 2 Fiber Information displayed

Column OTDR CD OSA PMD AP FOX

1st Alarm status (icon) & Fiber number

2nd Direction

3rd Lambda Length Nb Channel Length Length Length

4th Total Loss L0 Power Max. Delay 1 [email protected] L1310

5th Fiber Length S0 Power Min. Coeff. 1

[email protected] L1550

6th Nb of Event Dispersion at 1550 nm

OSNR Max Delay 2 [email protected] L1625

7th Max Splice — OSNR Min. Coeff 2 — O1310

8th Total ORL — — — — O1550

9th — — — — — OP1625

262 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 14 File managementLink Manager Function

Editing function The same editing functions as those from the Explorer are available with the Link Manager function:

– Directory: Copy (or cut) / Paste; Rename, Delete, (see “Directory edit function” on page 256) and burn on CD (see “CD-Rom burning (MTS / T-BERD 8000 only)” on page 264).

– File(s): Copy / Cut, Rename, Delete (see “File editing function” on page 257) except the merging function (as this is used with txt files).

Moreover, the Edit menu from the Fiber Info. function allows to export the whole directory, with the files corresponding to the active tab, in a txt file.

To export a directory:1 Select the Fiber Info. function

2 Select the tab corresponding to the files you want to use

3 Select the directory to open

4 Select one file from the list

5 Click on EDIT > EXPORT

The txt file is automatically generated, in the same directory as the one selected for the export.The name by default for the txt file is: fiber_info_”name of applica-tion selected”.txt. For exemple, for the export of the Fiber Informa-tion from the OTDR application, the txt file will be called: fiber_info_otdr.txt

This txt file is made of two parts:

– The Header, with general information: the equipment used and its serial number, the date and time of export, the location of the file, and the number of files exported.

– The table, countaining all the fibers information coming from the files of the active tab.

User Manual 780000102/12 263

Chapter 14 File managementCD-Rom burning (MTS / T-BERD 8000 only)

CD-Rom burning (MTS / T-BERD 8000 only)1 Go to the file explorer

2 Select the directory and/or the files to burn on the CD

3 Click on Edit

4 Click on Copy or Cut

5 Click on CD-R tools

6 If the CD-Rom is a CD-RW with data to be erased first, click on Erase CD-RW, otherwise go to step 8

Fig. 118 Exemple of a directory exported in a txt file (open with Excel)

Header of the txt file

Recall of the Fiber In-formation displayed on

the 8000 Base Unit (except alarm status)

Filename

If you cut the file(s) to save it to on the CD, they will not be on the Base Unit anymore.

264 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 14 File managementCD-Rom burning (MTS / T-BERD 8000 only)

7 A dialog box request to confirm that you want to erase existing data. Click Yes to continueA new message is displayed to inform you that all data is being erased on the CD-RW.

8 Click on Burn CD or Burn and Close CD, according to whether you wish to close the session of your CD or not.A new dialog box is displayed, asking you to check that the CD-Rom door is securely closed.A message is displayed to indicate that you need to wait, the CD-Rom is being burnt.

9 A last message appears a few minutes later to let you know that the CD-Rom has now been successfully burnt Click on any key to remove the message.

10 You may now securely remove the CD-Rom.

User Manual 780000102/12 265

Chapter 14 File managementCD-Rom burning (MTS / T-BERD 8000 only)

266 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 15 Macros

15

The macro function allows to store series of user actions, in order to play them back automatically.

The macro function is operational only while the Base Unit is used under the context of «fiber optic applications», meaning used with one of the following application selected: OTDR, OSA, CD, PMD, AP, LTS…

A file macro may also be operational with no active modules, as long as «Standalone results» for fiber optics is used, and concerned files are fiber optics files.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

– “Calling the Macro function” on page 268– “Macro recording” on page 268– “Default macro” on page 272– “Macro playback” on page 272– “Storing a macro” on page 273

Actions in the SYSTEM page will not be recorded.

User Manual 780000102/12 267

Chapter 15 MacrosCalling the Macro function

Calling the Macro functionThis function is accessible via the button SCRIPT, in the front of the Base Unit.

10 various macros may be created and used.

Once you click on the button SCRIPT, you see the list of all the 10 macro positions. Each number from 1 to 10, displays the name of the macro stored at that position, or displays «(Empty)» in case that particular spot is free.

Macro recordingThe Base Unit offers two different types of macro: Standard and File.

For both types, it is required to:

Select and activate all necessary modules before starting the macro recording

Fig. 119 List of Macros

Never press the SYSTEM key during macro recording

268 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 15 MacrosMacro recording

Standard macro This macro type shall be used to automate functions or operation mode.

To create a new standard macro:

1 Select a free position. A sub-menu automatically appears.

2 Change the Macro type if necessary to set it on Standard.

3 Click on the soft key Learn. You arrive directly to the Results page. You can now see the icon at the top of the screen. You are now ready to record.

4 Perform all actions you wish to record in your macro.

5 Click on SCRIPT when you are done, and select End Macro. You macro has now been saved.

6 Enter the name of your new macro in the text editor and confirm.

File macro This macro type shall be used to perform a template for multiple files.

To create a new file macro:

1 Select a free position. A sub-menu automatically appears.

2 Change the Macro type if necessary to set it on File.

3 Click on the soft key Learn. You arrive directly to the FILE page. You can read the message Load file to start learning at the top of the screen.

4 Select the file you want to work with to perform all actions.

5 Load and view the corresponding trace. You can now see the icon at the top of the screen indicating that you are ready now to

record.

6 Perform all actions you wish to record in your macro.

7 Click on SCRIPT when you are done, and select End Macro. You macro has now been saved.

NOTEAll events are recorded wether you use the Base Unit buttons, the soft keys, the touchscreen, a mouse, or an external keyboard.

NOTEThe speed of your actions is not really relevant. See «Macro playback» page 272

User Manual 780000102/12 269

Chapter 15 MacrosMacro recording

8 Enter the name of your new macro in the text editor and confirm.

Notes for standard macros also apply for file macros.

Adding interaction to

your macro

You may insert in your macro, a special dialog box, a message or a pause. These features will be very useful to you. They will give you some time to switch to another fiber if necessary, let you play a macro to a partial state and stop, or simply just bring your attention after or before a specific action is performed.

To access all these features, click on SCRIPT during the learning process of a macro, just like if it was done. Several soft keys will become avail-able.

Inserting a dialog box

Click on the soft key Insert Dialog Box. The dialog box editor is displayed. Enter the content of your dialog box and press confirm when you are done.

Inserting a message

Click on the soft key Insert Message. The Message text editor is displayed. Enter the content of your message and press confirm when you are done.

Inserting a pause Click on the soft key Insert Pause. This action will automatically make the macro wait for a user action.

NOTEDialog boxes and messages serve different purposes when the macro is played back. A message will just appear to bring your attention to a specific point and wait until you are ready to continue. A dialog box will give you the choice between continuing to play the macro, or aborting it, letting you partially play a macro in some cases.

NOTEDuring playback, you can see the icon when a pause is encoun-tered. Press any key to restart the playback.

270 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 15 MacrosMacro recording

Renaming a macro

Whether you just created a new macro or you wish to modify the name of an existing macro, you may edit the name and change it as much as you want.

1 Select the macro and select Name on the sub-menu.

2 Click on to open the text editor, and type your name.

3 Click on Confirm to accept your new name.

The «Overwrite Config.» setting

Both your actions and the actual configuration are saved when you create a new macro. So when you play a macro back, you have the choice between:

1 Playing all actions and keeping the actual configuration

Your actions are fairly independent of the configuration, and you don’t wish to modify the current configuration: set Overwrite Config. on No.

2 Playing all actions and restoring the original configuration

Your actions are very dependant of the configuration, for example in case you need to do some measurements where you wish to keep all the acquisition parameters the same: set Overwrite Config. on Yes. This setting will also allow to make sure all necessary modules are selected in the SYSTEM page before the macro is started.

Replacing a macro

Select an existing macro and click on the soft key Learn.

A message will be displayed, asking you if you really wish to overwrite the macro. Click Yes if you wish to continue.

Removing a macro

Select an existing macro and click on the soft key Remove.

A message will be displayed, asking you if you really wish to delete the selected macro. Click Yes if you wish to continue.

It is strongly recommended to use the second method where all con-figuration is restored before playing the macro. Only experienced users might decide to do otherwise for different reasons.

User Manual 780000102/12 271

Chapter 15 MacrosDefault macro

Default macro

How to use the default macro

It is possible to set one macro as default. This is very useful if for example, you wish to perform one macro several times in a row. Double clicking on the button SCRIPT will automatically play the default macro.

How to set a macro as

default

Select Default Macro, and choose in the sub-menu, which macro you wish to set as default.

As an alternative, you may also select a macro and press the soft key Set as default.

Macro playbackTo play the default macro, you may directly double click on SCRIPT.

To play another macro, go to the macro screen (Click on SCRIPT once), and select the macro you wish to play. Then press the soft key Play.

Fig. 120 Default button

Macro 2 is set as default

Alternatively, set any other macro as default using this button

272 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 15 MacrosStoring a macro

During all the play back of the macro, you can see the icon at the top of the screen.

All actions recorded in your macro are now performed.

The speed of the playback is not the same as the speed of the record-ing. All actions except for acquisitions, will appear faster, but will remain slow enough to let you see what is currently performed. Acquisition times remain the same as during the recording.

.

Script (specific option)According the configuration of the MTS/T-BERD 8000, this one can be equipped with a Script function, available on the same page as the macro page. To use the script, a MTAU module is mandatory, see “Use of the script (specific client option)” on page 235.

Storing a macroThe Base Unit lets you save macros as files on the hard disk or other storage media.

NOTEThis icon changes to when the playback is suspended by a pause event, waiting for the user to restart the process (see «Inserting a pause» page 270).

NOTEDon’t forget to add interactive events during your macro recording if you need a pause, a specific message or simply to be able to abort the macro at a certain stage if necessary.

Touching a button on the Base Unit will automatically cause the macro playback to abort, except for restarting the playback, interrupted by a pause event.

NOTEFor a File macro, you may select several files before you call the Macro function.

User Manual 780000102/12 273

Chapter 15 MacrosStoring a macro

To store a macro, select it and click on the soft key Store. It will automat-ically store it in the current directory.

To reload this macro later on, go to the file explorer and load the file. The macro will automatically take the first available place in the list of your 10 macros.

NOTEIf you wish to store your macro at a specific place on your storage media, make sure you use the file explorer to set that place as your current directory.

The macro can not be loaded if no macro position is available.

274 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 16 Printer

16

This chapter describes the function, the configuration and use of the Printer module.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

– “Function of the printer module” on page 276– “Loading a new paper roll” on page 277– “Setting up the printer” on page 278– “Printing a page” on page 278

This module is only applicable to the 8000 series platform.

User Manual 780000102/12 275

Chapter 16 PrinterFunction of the printer module

Function of the printer moduleThe printer module 82PRINTER brings an internal printer to the Base Unit.

The printer itself may be completely integrated in the Base Unit module, or may be fully exposed.

Exposing the printer

In order to load a new paper roll (see «Loading a new paper roll» page 277) or to see clearly the printer normally hidden within the printer module, you may «expose» the internal printer.

To expose the printer out of the module:

1 Unscrew the locking screws on each side of the module.

2 Pull on these screws to lift the printer up until you reach the maximum exposed position and hear the click of the lever.

Fig. 121 Exposing the printer out of the module

Locking screws

Lever to release module

NOTEYou may use the printer in the same manner, whether it is fully inte-grated in its module or exposed as shown in the figure.

276 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 16 PrinterLoading a new paper roll

Releasing the printer back

into the module.

To release the printer, hold the module while you push on the lever.

Loading a new paper rollIn order to load a new paper roll, proceed as follows:

1 Expose the printer outside of its module (see «Exposing the printer» page 276)

2 Set the lever to position A

3 Insert the paper roll as shown on figure «Loading paper in the printer» page 277)

4 Fold the paper to ease loading

5 Ensure paper is enrolled as shown on figure «Loading paper in the printer» page 277)

6 Pull paper through opening in panel

7 Reset the lever to position C

It is important to hold the module while you push on the lever. If you don’t, you may stuck your finger and/or damage the internal printer.

Fig. 122 Loading paper in the printer

2- Lever in position A

4 -Fold the paper to ease loading

5 -Ensure paper is unrolled as shown

3 — Push in opposite direction to insert the paper roll

Spare paper roll may be inserted here

User Manual 780000102/12 277

Chapter 16 PrinterSetting up the printer

Setting up the printerThe printer must be correctly configured in the setup menu: Printer must be set to Internal or Internal compressed.

The Printer icon must be activated in the SYSTEM screen, such as shown in figure «Printer activated» page 278.

For both these requirements, you may refer to the Base Unit manual.

Printing a pageBefore printing a page, make sure you remove the cover and push it back until it holds open.

Press PRINT. The page currently displayed will be printing. You can see the icon at the top of the screen, until the page is finished to be printed.

Fig. 123 Printer activated

Paper used with internal printer is thermo-sensitive and photo-sensi-tive: Keep your printed documents away from heat and light.

278 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 17 Technical specifications

17

This chapter shows the technical specifications of the plug-ins, of the Base Unit, and options and accessories available.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

– “Reflectometer plug-ins” on page 280– “WDM plug-ins” on page 288– “PMD plug-ins” on page 290– “CD OTDR plug-ins” on page 290– “ODM plug-ins (preliminary specifications)” on page 292– “Information on «fiber» plug-ins 5020TF and 82LFSM2 / 82LFSM4”

on page 293– “MTAU plug-ins” on page 294– “BBS plug-ins (preliminary specifications)” on page 295– “OFI plug -ins” on page 295– “Warning” on page 297

User Manual 780000102/12 279

Chapter 17 Technical specificationsReflectometer plug-ins

Reflectometer plug-ins

Characteristics of reflectometry measurements

Measurement of distance

– Dual cursor – Distance displayed takes into account the calibration of the refrac-

tive index of the fiber.– Index adjustable from 1,30000 to 1,70000 in steps of 0,00001– Resolution of display : 1 cm max.– Resolution of cursor : 1 cm max.– Spacing of measurement points: from 4 cm, with up to 128 000

acquisition points .– Accuracy : ± 1m± sampling resolution ±10-5 x distance

(excluding errors of calibration of refractive index of the fiber).

Measurement of attenuation

– Dual cursor– Resolution of display: 0,001 dB– Resolution of cursor : 0,001 dB– Linearity : ± 0,05 dB /dB ± 0,05 dB for SR, SRe, UHD and SRL

Multimode plug-ins. ± 0.03 dB/dB for LR, VLR, VSRE, MR and SRL Sing-lemode plug-ins

Measurement of reflectance

– Resolution of display: 0,01 dB– Accuracy : ± 4 dB.

± 2 dB for LR, VLR, VSRE1, MR and SRL plug-ins

Automatic measurement

– Automatic measurement of all the elements of the signal. Slope measurement by least squares or 2 points of measurement.

1.Specified for pluse 1 µs

280 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 17 Technical specificationsReflectometer plug-ins

– Display threshold of faults :- 0 to 5.99 dB in steps of 0.01 dB for event thresholds — 11 to -99 dB in steps of 1 dB for the reflectance — 0 to 1.99 dB/km in steps of 0.001 dB/km for slope.

– Display of slope and attenuation for a segment of fiber.– Display of the position of a fault and of attenuation.– Display of the reflectance of the fault.– Display of ORL

Manual Measurement

– Measurement of slope between the cursors.– Measurement of attenuation between two segments of fiber.– Measurement of reflectance of a reflecting element.– Measurement of ORL between the two cursors.– Measurement of splice by 2 or 5 points method

User Manual 780000102/12 281

Chapter 17 Technical specificationsReflectometer plug-ins

Typical specifications of OTDR plug-

ins

The specifications provided below are valid wathever the wavelength configuration (single, dual, triple or quadruple wavelength).

Multi-mode modulesTypical values, measured at 25°C, unless otherwise indicated:

Plug-ins Multimode

81xxMM 81xxSRL (preliminary specifications)

Central Wave-length1

850 ± 20 nm

1300 ± 20 nm

850 nm± 20 nm

1300 nm± 20 nm

min IEC Dynamic Range2 min 20 dB min 18 dB

Typical RMS3 Dynamic Range 25 dB 23 dB 25 dB 23 dB

Distance Range Up to 80 km Up to 80 km

Pulse width 3 ns to 200 ns 3 ns to 300 ns

Event Dead Zone4 at 3 ns 1.5 m 0.5 m

Attenuation dead zone5 at 3 ns 5 m 2.5 m

1. Laser at 50 ns and 25°C.2. Guaranteed value corresponding to the one-way difference (in dB) between the level of back-diffusion

extrapolated at the beginning of the fiber and the level containing 98% of noise, after 3 minutes of averaging, with the largest pulsewidth (according to IEC 61749 standard).

3. Typical value corresponding to the difference (in dB) between the level of back-diffusion extrapolated at the beginning of the fiber and the RMS noise level, after 3 minutes of averaging, with the largest pulsewidth.

4. Measured at 1.5 dB below the peak of a non-saturated reflecting event with the shortest pulsewidth5. Measured at +/- 0.5 dB on the basis of a linear regression from a reflectance of type FC/UPC, with the

shortest pulsewidth.

282 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 17 Technical specificationsReflectometer plug-ins

Single-mode modules

Plug-ins Monomode

Plug-ins Short distanceUltra High Dynamic Long distance

Very Long Range Long Range Medium

RangeVery Short Range

8114/15/26 SR/SRe

8115/26/36/29 UHD 81xx VLR 81xx LR 81xx MR 81xxVSRE

Central Wave-length1

1310 ± 20 nm1550 ± 20 nm

1310 ± 20 nm1550 ± 20 nm 1625 ± 10 nm

1310 ± 20 nm1383 ± 2 nm1490 ± 15 nm1550 ± 20 nm1625 ± 15 nm

1310 ± 20 nm1490 ± 15 nm1550 ± 20 nm1625 ± 10 nm

1310 ± 20 nm1490 ± 15 nm1550 ± 20 nm1625 ± 10 nm

1310 ± 20 nm1550 ± 20 nm

min IEC Dynamic2 27,5 dB25 dB

min 42 dBmin 45 dBmin 42 dB

min 40dBmin 39 dBmin 37 dB

min 38.5 dBmin 38 dB

min 39 dBmin 37 dBmin 37 dBmin 37 dB

min 36 dBmin 36 dB

min 33,5 dBmin 33,5 dB

min 28 dBmin 26,5 dB

Typical RMS Dynamic Range3

SR: 35 / 33 dBSRe: 34 / 32 dB

45.5 dB50 dB

45.5 dB4

45 db44 dB42 dB43 db42 dB

43 dB40 dB41 dB41 dB

40 dB40 dB38 dB37 dB

32 dB30 dB

Distance Range up to 260 km up to 380 km up to 380 km up to 380 km up to 380 km up to 260 km

Pulse width 10 ns to 10 μs

10 ns to 20 μs 3ns to 20 µs 3 ns to 20 µs 3 ns to 20 µs 10 ns to 10 µs

Event Dead Zone5 3 m 4,5 m 0,8 m6 0.8 m6 0.8 m6 2,5 m

Attenuation Dead Zone7 25 m 15 m 4 m 4 m6 4 m6 8 m

Continuous Wave Output Power — — 0 dBm 0 dBm -3.5 dBm -3.5 dBm

1. Laser at 10 μs and 25° C2. Guaranteed value corresponding to the one-way difference (in dB) between the level of back-diffusion

extrapolated at the beginning of the fiber and the level containing 98% of noise, after 3 minutes of averaging, with the largest pulsewidth (according to IEC 61749 standard).

3. Typical value corresponding to the difference (in dB) between the level of back-diffusion extrapolated at the beginning of the fiber and the RMS noise level , after 3 minutes of averaging, with the largest pulsewidth.

4. at 20 μs pulse width with Non Zero Dispersion Fibers in single wavelength configuration.5. EDZ measured at 1.5 dB below the peak of a non-saturated reflecting event at shortest

pulsewidth.6. at 1310 nm7. ADZ measured at +/+/- 0.5 dB on the basis of a linear regression from a reflectance of type FC/

UPC (-55 dB) at shortest pulsewidth.

User Manual 780000102/12 283

Chapter 17 Technical specificationsReflectometer plug-ins

Multi/Single mode module (Preliminary Specifications)

Multimode / SinglemodeSRL Plug-in

Central Wavelength1 850 / 1300 nm± 20 nm

1300 / 1550 / 1625 nm± 20 nm

Typical RMS Dynamic Range2 25 / 23 dB 40 / 38 / 37 dB

Distance Range Up to 80 km Up to 380 km

Pulse width 3 ns to 300 ns 3 ns to 20 µs

Event Dead Zone3 0.5 m 0.8 m

Attenuation Dead Zone4

2.5 m 4 m

Continuous Wave Output Power — — 3,5 dBm

1. Laser at 10 µs and 25° C2. Typical value corresponding to the difference (in dB) between the level of back-diffusion

extrapolated at the beginning of the fiber and the RMS noise level , after 3 minutes of averag-ing, with the largest pulsewidth.

3. EDZ measured at 1.5 dB below the peak of a non-saturated reflecting event at shortest pulsewidth.

4. ADZ measured at +/- 0.5 dB on the basis of a linear regression from a reflectance of type FC/PC (-55 dB) at shortest pulsewidth.

284 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 17 Technical specificationsReflectometer plug-ins

Classes of the lasers of the

OTDR plug-ins

Ranges Ranges for MM plug-ins

Module Standard EN 60825-1, Ed. 1.2, 2001-08 FDA21CFR§1040.10Multimode MM

— at 850 nm- at 1300 nm

Class 1MClass 1

Class 1Class 1

Single-mode SR, SRe,DR, VSRE Class 1 Class 1

Singlemode HD, VHD, UHD

— at 1310 nm- at 1550 and 1625 nm

Class 1MClass 1

Class 1Class 1

Singlemode LR, & VLR

— at 1310 and 1383nm- at 1490, 1550 and 1625 nm

Class 1MClass 1

Class 1Class 1

Single-mode MR Class 1 Class 1

MultimodeSRL

Multimode / SinglemodeSRL

Class 1M Class 1M

3 ns 20 ns 50 ns 200 ns0.5 km X X X1 km X X X X2 km X X X X5 km X X X X10 km X X X X20 km X X X X40 km X X X80 km X

User Manual 780000102/12 285

Chapter 17 Technical specificationsReflectometer plug-ins

Ranges for SRL Multimode Plug-ins

Ranges for SR and SRe modules

Ranges for DR plug-ins

3 ns 10 ns 30 ns 100 ns 300 ns0.5 km X X1 km X X X2 km X X X X5 km X X X X X10 km X X X X X20 km X X X X40 km X X80 km X X

10 ns 30 ns 100 ns 300 ns 1 μs 3 μs 10 μs2 km x x x5 km x x x x10 km x x x x x20 km x x x x x x40 km x x x x x x x80 km x x x x x140 km x x x x260 km x

5 ns 20 ns 100 ns 300 ns 1 μs 3 μs 10 μs2 km x x x5 km x x x x10 km x x x x x20 km x x x x x x40 km x x x x x x80 km x x x x x140 km x x x x260 km x x x

286 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 17 Technical specificationsReflectometer plug-ins

Ranges for HD plug-ins

Ranges for VHD and UHD plug-ins

Ranges for LR / VLR / MR / SRL Singlemode plug-ins

10 ns 30 ns 100 ns 300 ns 1 μs 3 μs 10 μs 20 μs5 km x x x x10 km x x x x x20 km x x x x x x40 km x x x x x x x x80 km x x x x x x x x140 km x x x x x x x260 km x x x x x380 km x x

10 ns 30 ns 100 ns 300 ns 1 μs 3 μs 10 μs 20 μs5 km x x x x10 km x x x x x20 km x x x x x x40 km x x x x x x x x80 km x x x x x x x x140 km x x x x x x x260 km x x x x x380 km x x x

3 ns 30 ns 100 ns 300 ns 1 μs 3 μs 10 μs 20 μs5 km x x10 km x x x20 km x x x x x40 km x x x x x x x x80 km x x x x x x x x140 km x x x x x x x260 km x x x x x380 km x x

User Manual 780000102/12 287

Chapter 17 Technical specificationsWDM plug-ins

Ranges for VSRE plug-ins

OTDR plug-ins measures

Weight : approx. 500 g (1.1 lbs)

Dimensions (in mm, without front panel) — w x h x d: 120 x 27 x 211

WDM plug-ins

Typical specifications of WDM plug-

ins

Typical specifications, measured at 25°C, unless otherwise indicated.

10 ns 30 ns 100 ns 300 ns 1 μs 3 μs 10 μs1 km x x2 km x x x5 km x x x x10 km x x x x x20 km x x x x x x40 km x x x x x x80 km x x x x x x160 km x x x x

Plug-in 81WDM ModuleS+C+L

Plug-in 81WDMPMD moduleO+E+S+C+L

WavelengthRange 1485-1640 nm 1260-1640 nmDuration of sweep (in real time) 1.5 s 3sAccuracy 1 ± 10 pmResolution of display 1 pmMinimum interval between channels

10 GHz (80 pm)

Optical Bandwidth (FWHM)2 30 pm

288 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 17 Technical specificationsWDM plug-ins

Dimensions and weight of

WDM measurement

plug-ins

Weight : approx. 500 g (1.1 lbs)

Dimensions (in mm, without front panel) :

– Width : 120– Height :27– Length : 211

PowerRange of display — 90 dBm at + 30 dBmResolution of display 0,01 dBChannel measurement range3 — 79 dBm at + 10 dBmNoise floor4 -86 dBmMax. permissible power,before signal cut off:- total — per channel

+ 20 dBm+ 10 dBm

Accuracy in power 5 ± 0,5 dB maxLinearity6 ± 0,2 dBFlatness7 ± 0,2 dBDependence on polarization ± 0,05 dB ± 0,15 dBORL (Optical Return Loss) 35 dBORR (Optical Rejection Ratio)8 35 dB at 50 GHz from the carrier

40 dB at 100 GHz from the carrier

1. from -40 dBm to +5 dBm, in the range of 1525-1620 nm2. in the range of 1525-1570 nm3. @ 1550 nm, with averaging, -75 dBm without averaging4. @ 1550 nm, with averaging, -81 dBm without averaging5. at -30 dBm and 1550 nm, excluding the uncertainty relating to the input connector .6. @ 1590 nm from 0 to -40 dBm7. in the range of 1525 nm — 1620 nm (reference : 1550 nm)8. on the basis of the peak of a single carrier, on the band 1530 nm — 1605 nm, at 0 dBm and with

max. resolution

Plug-in 81WDM ModuleS+C+L

Plug-in 81WDMPMD moduleO+E+S+C+L

User Manual 780000102/12 289

Chapter 17 Technical specificationsPMD plug-ins

PMD plug-insTypical values, measured at 25°C, unless specified otherwise.

CD OTDR plug-ins

Typical specifications of CD OTDR plug-insTypical values, measured at 25°C, unless otherwise specified.

Plug-in 81PMD 81WDMPMD

Measurement time1

1. within 1485-1640 nm, without averaging

6 seconds(independent of the PMD value)

Dynamic range Up to 45 dB

DGD

Measurement range 0.080 ps to 60 ps2

2. up to 150 ps for weak coupling

Uncertainty ± 0.020 ps / + 2% PMD3

3. weak coupling for 0.1 ps to 60 ps DGD range, up to 35 dB budget loss — traceable to NPL standard

Repeatability 0.025 ps4

4. weak coupling for 0.1 ps to 60 ps DGD range, up to 35 dB budget loss — traceable to NPL standard

CD specifications 5083 CD OTDR plug-in

Measurement timeManualAutothroughout the wavelength range

from 40 s

Dynamic1 up to 120 km

Minimum distance2 10 km

Wavelength 1255 to 1650 nm

Absolute accuracy of wavelength +/- 0.1 nm

Repeatability of dispersion coefficient3 +/- 0.2 ps/(nm*km)

290 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 17 Technical specificationsCD OTDR plug-ins

Laser class of source of CD OTDR plug-inAt 1310, 1480, 1550, 1625 nm: laser class 1.

Dispersion range 0.1 ps at 100 ps/(nm*km)

Repeatability of dispersion slope +/- 1%

1. with automatic measurement and termination connector, 3-point measure-ment

2. on a non-saturated Fresnel3. at 1550 nm, on a G652 fiber 75 km long

CD specifications 5083 CD OTDR plug-in

Source specifications 5083 CD OTDR plug-in

Wavelength (DFB lasers) 1310 ± 5 nm 1480 ± 5 nm 1550 ± 5 nm 1625 ± 5 nm

Spectrum width < 10 pm

Power stability over 24 h1

Output power, calibrated± 0,10 dB

Output power, calibrated 1.5 dBm 3 dBm 3 dBm 3 dBm

Output power, Variable -10 dB with respect to calibrated power

1. after 15 minutes pre-heating

OTDR Specifications 5083 CD OTDR plug-in

Wavelength (DFB lasers) 1310 ± 5 nm 1480± 5 nm 1550± 5 nm 1625 ± 5 nm

IEC dynamic (guaranteed)1 35 dB 33 dB 32,5 dB 33 dB

Dynamic RMS (typical)2 39 dB 38 dB 37 dB 37 dB

Distance 380 km

Pulse width 10 ns to 20 μs

Dead Zone- Event (EDZ)3

— Attenuation (ADZ)46 m.30 m

1. Guaranteed value corresponding to the one-way difference (in dB) between the level of back-diffusion extrapolated at the beginning of the fiber and the level containing 98% of noise, after 3 minutes of averaging, with the largest pulsewidth (according to IEC 61749 standard).

2. Typical value corresponding to the difference (in dB) between the level of back-diffusion extrapolated at the beginning of the fiber and the RMS noise level, after 3 minutes of averaging. with the largest pulsewidth

3. EDZ measured at 1.5 dB below the peak of a non-saturated reflecting event at shortest pulsewidth.4. ADZ measured at +/- 0.5 dB on the basis of a linear regression from a reflectance of type FC/UPC (-55

dB) at shortest pulsewidth.

User Manual 780000102/12 291

Chapter 17 Technical specificationsODM plug-ins (preliminary specifications)

ODM plug-ins (preliminary specifications)

Typical specifications of ODM plug-insTypical values, measured at 25°C, unless otherwise specified.

Chromatic Dispersion specifications 50km G652 10km G655

Wavelength Acquisition Range 1260 — 1640 nm

Wavelength Uncertainty +/- 0.1 nm

Minimum length 1 km

Dynamic Range 42 dB1

50 dB2

Display Measurement range +/- 6ns/nm

Dispersion Accuracy +/- 0.30ps/nm.km +/- 0.15ps/nm.km

Dispersion Repeatability +/- 0.05ps/nm.km +/- 0.05ps/nm.km

Zero Wavelength Accuracy +/- 2 nm +/- 0.5 nm

Slope at Zero Wavelength Accuracy +/- 5% +/- 2%

Slope at Zero Wavelength Repeatability +/- 1% +/- 0.5%

Measurement Time From 45s to 75s

1. With Broadband Source module2. With handheld Broadband Source

Polarization Mode Dispersion 50km G652

Dynamic Range 40 dB1

55 dB2

DGD Measrurement range 0.08 to 60 ps

DGD Absolute uncertainty 2, 3 +/- 0.02 ps +/- 2% PMD

DGD Repeatability 2, 3 +/- 0.025 ps

Measurement Time 4 6 seconds, independant of PMD value

1. With Broadband Source module2. With handheld Broadband Source3. Up to 150 ps in weak mode coupling4. Weak Mode Coupling, between 0.1 ps and 60 ps DGD range

292 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 17 Technical specificationsInformation on «fiber» plug-ins 5020TF and 82LFSM2 / 82LFSM4

Information on «fiber» plug-ins 5020TF and 82LFSM2 / 82LFSM4

5020TF plug-in The 5020 TF single-mode and multi-mode modules contain two reels of fiber for use with a reflectometer. They are intended for training and demonstration and can be used as launch cable.

Recommendations for using fiber 2 (long fiber)The attenuation per unit length of fiber 2 may be higher near port 1 :

– when measuring a dead zone it is preferable to connect the reflecto-meter to port 4.

Fig. 124 Front panel of a «fiber» plug-in (ex 5020TF/SM)

Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4

NOTEAs these plug-ins are not test instruments, they are not supplied with a certificate of calibration.

Module 5020TF/MM (Multimode)

Module 5020TF/SM(Single-mode)

Type of fiber used Corning MM Corning SMF 28

Recommended group indi-ces

1.50140 @ 850nm ; 1.49660 @ 1310nm

1.46750 @ 1310nm ; 1.46810 @ 1550/1625nm

Length of fiber 1Length of fiber 2

300 ± 30 m300 ± 30 m

466 ± 23 m1000 ± 50 m

Attenuation of connectors 0.5 dB 1

1.Guaranteed at 1625 nm except for port 1 of fiber 2, connectors cleaned, in good conditions.

User Manual 780000102/12 293

Chapter 17 Technical specificationsMTAU plug-ins

– when measuring insertion loss of a connector situated after the launch cable, it is preferable to connect the reflectometer to port 1.

82LFSM2 / 82LFSM4 plug-

ins

82LFSM2 / 82LFSM4 plug-ins contain one reel of singlemode fiber with two jumpers, to be used as a launch or receive cable with an OTDR. These plug-ins can also be used for demonstration and training purpose.

MTAU plug-insAll specifications are given at 25°C, excluding connectors.

NOTEAs these plug-ins are not test instruments, they are not supplied with a certificate of calibration.

82LFSM2 82LFSM4

Type of fiber used Corning SMF 28 or SMF 28e

Recommended group indices 1.4677 @ 1310nm and 1.4682 @ 1550/1625nm

Length of fiber 2 km -0.02/+0.11 km 4 km -0.03/+0.21 km

Attenuation of connectors < 0.5 dB1

1. Connectors cleaned, in good conditions

Plug-in 81MTAU4

Wavelength range (nm) 1260 — 1640 nm

Insertion Loss (max dB) 1.5 dB

Return Loss (max dB) 50 dB

PDL1 (max dB)

1. Polarization Dependent Loss

0.1 dB

Repeatability2 (max dB)

2. At constant temperature and polarization

0.01 dB

294 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 17 Technical specificationsBBS plug-ins (preliminary specifications)

BBS plug-ins (preliminary specifications)Specifications, measured at 25°C, unless otherwise mentioned.

Broadband Source New Generation

OFI plug -ins

Bi-directional loss specifications.Specifications, measured at 25°C

Parameter 81BBS2A

Wavelength range 1260 — 1640 nm

Minimum spectral density (dBm / 0,1 nm) -42 1

1. over 1270 — 1600 nm wavelength range

Output power (dBm) ≥ 8Polarisation extinction ratio (dB) > 102

2. for each of the three SLEDs independently.

Power consumption (Wh) 10

Operating temperature range (°C) -5 to 45°C

NOTEThis applies to the 81xx OFI modules.

To ensure optimal use (bi-directional measurement and communica-tion), two units are required.

Source function (also valid for source mode)

81xx OFI Module

Laser type Class 1 laser

Wavelength at 25° C 1310+/-20 nm, 1490+/-3 nm, 1550+/-30 nm, 1625+/-5 nm

Nominal output level into 9/125 µm fiber (CW mode)

— 3.5 dBm

Modulated output level 3 dB lower

User Manual 780000102/12 295

Chapter 17 Technical specificationsOFI plug -ins

Standalone power meter

Level stability

Short term 15 min (ΔT = +/- 0.3 K)1 +/- 0.02 dB

Long term 8 hours (ΔT = +/- 3 K)1 +/- 0.2 dB

1. After 15 min warm up

Source function (also valid for source mode)

81xx OFI Module

Bidirectional loss function (FOX port) 81xx OFI Module

Dynamic range 60 dB

Accuracy1

Loop backSide-by-side

+/-0.25 dB without optical connection uncertainty+/-0.15 dB without optical connection uncertainty

Display resolution 0.01 dB

Type of detector InGaAs

Type of fiber 9 µm

Precision of length measurement +/- 1.5% (3 to 200 km)

1. After 15 minutes warm up.

Optical Return Loss 81xx OFI Module

ORL measurement display range Up to 65 dBFor wavelengths 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm: — 60 dB with APC connector type

Display resolution 0.01 dB

Accuracy +/- 0,5 dB typical (from +14 to 50 dB with APC connector)

Standalone power meter functions 81xx OFI Module

Wavelength range (adjust-able per 1 nm) 800 to1650 nm

Selectable wavelength850 / 980 / 1300 / 1310 / 1420 / 1450 / 1480 / 1490 / 1510 / 1550 / 1625 nm and one user-defined

296 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 17 Technical specificationsWarning

WarningWarning for 82PRINTER module, 81WDM, 81PMD, 81WDMPMD and UHD and VLR plug-ins:

These are class A products. In a domestic environment, theses products may cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

Auto-λ detection (if signals are emitted by a JDSU source)

850 / 1310 / 1490 / 1550 / 1625 nm

Detected modulation 270 Hz, 330 Hz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz

Power Level Standard High Power

Display range +10 to -60 dBm +26 to -55 dBm

Accuracy +/- 0.2 dB (+5 dBm to -50 dBm)

+/- 0.25 dB(+23 dBm to -50 dBm)

Detector type Ge Filtered InGaAs, 2 mm

Display resolution 0,01 dB

Type of fiber 9 µm to 50 µm

User Manual 780000102/12 297

Chapter 17 Technical specificationsWarning

298 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 18 Options and accessories

18

This chapter describes all the accessories and options available with the MTS / T-BERD series.

The topics discussed in this chapter are as follows:

– “References of measurement plug-ins” on page 300– “User manual references” on page 305– “References of optical connectors and adapters” on page 305

User Manual 780000102/12 299

Chapter 18 Options and accessoriesReferences of measurement plug-ins

References of measurement plug-ins

OTDR Modules1 Multimode Module

Singlemode Module

1. Supplied with its manual E8100M0X ( X depends on language)Specify optical connector of each OTDR plug-in *Oblique universal connector not available on 812XMM OTDR plug-ins

Multimode plug-ins Reference

Multimode High Resolution 850/1300 nm E8123MM

Short Range LAN 25dB 850 nm E8111SRL

Short Range LAN 23 dB 1300 nm E8112SRL

Short Range LAN 25/23 dB 850/1300 nm E8123SRL

SRe plug-ins Reference

Short distance 34 dB 1310 nm E8114SRe

Short distance 32 dB 1550 nm E8115SRe

Short distance 34/32 dB 1310/1550 nm E8126SRe

SR plug-ins Reference

Short distance 33 dB 1310 nm E8115SR

Short distance 35 dB 1550 nm E8114SR

Short distance 35/33 dB 1310/1550 nm E8126SR

UHD plug-ins Reference

Ultra long distance 1550 nm E8115UHD

Ultra long distance 1310/1550 nm E8126UHD

Ultra long distance 1550/1625 nm E8129UHD

Ultra long distance 1310/1550/1625 nm E8136UHD

300 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 18 Options and accessoriesReferences of measurement plug-ins

OTDR plug-in for calibration reports Reference

OTDR plug-in for calibration ratios E81OTDRCR

VLR plug-in Reference

Very Long Range 42 dB 1625 nm OTDR plug-in E8117VLR

Very Long Range 42 dB 1625 nm OTDR plug-in with filter

E8117RVLR

Very Long Range 42 dB 1490 nm OTDR plug-in E8118VLR49

Very Long Range 43 dB 1550 nm OTDR plug-in E8115VLR

Very Long Range 44 dB 1383 nm OTDR plug-in E8118VLR

Very Long Range 45 dB 1310 nm OTDR plug-in E8114VLR

Very Long Range 43/42 dB 1550/1625 nm OTDR plug-in

E8129VLR

Very Long Range 45/43 dB 1310/1550 nm OTDR plug-in

E8126VLR

Very Long Range 45/43/42 dB 1310/1550/1625 nm OTDR plug-in

E8136VLR

Very Long Range 45/42/43 dB 1310/1490/1550 nm OTDR plug-in

E8138VLR49

Very Long Range 45/44/43/42 dB 1310/1383/1550/1625 nm OTDR plug-in

E8148VLR38

LR plug-ins Reference

Long Range 40 dB 1490 nm OTDR plug-in E8118LR49

Long Range 41 dB 1625 nm OTDR plug-in with filter E8117RLR

Long Range 41 dB 1625 nm OTDR plug-in E8117LR

Long Range 41 dB 1550 nm OTDR plug-in E8115LR

Long Range 43 dB 1310 nm OTDR plug-in E8114LR

Long Range 41/41 dB 1550/1625 nm OTDR plug-in E8129LR

Long Range 43/41 dB 1310/1550 nm OTDR plug-in E8126LR

Long Range 43/40/41 dB 1310/1490/1550 nm OTDR plug-in

E8138LR49

Long Range 43/41/41 dB 1310/1550/1625 nm OTDR plug-in

E8136LR

User Manual 780000102/12 301

Chapter 18 Options and accessoriesReferences of measurement plug-ins

WDM/PMD Modules

LR and VLR option OTDR plug-in Reference

Source Option for LR and VLR plug-ins E81OTDRLS

MR plug-ins Reference

Medium range 37dB 1625 nm OTDR plug-in E8117MR

Medium range 38 dB 1550 nm OTDR plug-in E8115MR

Medium range 40 dB 1310 nm OTDR plug-in E8114MR

Medium range 38/37dB 1550/1625 nm OTDR plug-in E8129MR

Medium range 40/38 dB 1310/1550 nm OTDR plug-in E8126MR

Medium range 40/38/37dB 1310/1550/1625 nm OTDR plug-in E8136MR

Medium range 40/40/39 dB 1310/1490/1550 nm OTDR plug-in E8138MR49

VSRE plug-ins Reference

Low range 26 dB 1550 nm OTDR plug-in E8115VSRE

Low range 28/26 dB 1310/1550 nm OTDR plug-in E8126VSRE

SRL Singlemode/Multimode plug-ins Reference

Short Range LAN 25/23/40/38 dB 850/1300/1310/1550 nm OTDR plug-in

E8146SRL

Short Range LAN 25/23/40/38/37 dB 850/1300/1310/1550/1625 nm OTDR plug-in

E8156SRL

Continuous Source option (for singlemode wavelength only) E80OTDRLS

PMD plug-ins Reference

PMD Plug-in Band S+C+L E81PMD

PMD + AP + WDM plug-in Band O+E+S+C+L E81WDMPMD

WDM plug-ins Reference

WDM plug-in Band S+C+L E81WDM

302 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 18 Options and accessoriesReferences of measurement plug-ins

CD Modules

ODM Module

MTAU Modules

PMD accessories Reference

Optical variable polarizer (not necessary for 81XXX plug-ins) EOVP-15

Broadband source for PMD measurements EOBS-15

CD plug-ins Reference

OTDR/CD module 1310/1480/1550/1625 — 35 dB E5083 CD + E50otdrExt

CD options Reference

Sources 1310/1480/1550/1625 DFB E508X/LS

CD accessories Reference

Termination connector FC/PC & APC ETERM/CD/FC

Termination connector SC/PC & APC ETERM/CD/SC

Termination connector ST/PC & APC ETERM/CD/ST

Termination connector E2000/HR&HRL ETERM/CD/E2000

ODM plug-in1 Reference

Combined long range CD, PMD and AP measurement — 1260 — 1640 nm E81DISPAP

Long Range Chromatic Dispersion Module — 1260 — 1640 nm E81CD

1. Select one of the following Broadband Source: EOBS550 or E81BBS2A

MTAU plug-ins, 8100 series Reference

Multi Test Access Unit for 4 test modules1 E81MTAU4

1. Connector type must be specified.

User Manual 780000102/12 303

Chapter 18 Options and accessoriesReferences of measurement plug-ins

OFI Modules

BBS Modules

Application Softwares

Printer

OFI plug-ins Reference

1310/1550nm OFI plug-in module — standard power E8126OFI1

1310/1550nm OFI plug-in module — high power E8126OFI2

1310/1550/1625nm OFI plug-in module — standard power E8136OFI1

1310/1550/1625nm OFI plug-in module — high power E8136OFI2

1310/1490/1550nm OFI plug-in module — standard power E8132OFI1

1310/1490/1550nm OFI plug-in module — high power E8132OFI2

OFI Module option Reference

ORL option for OFI plug-in module with mandrel E81OFIORL

BBS plug ins Reference

BroadBand Source plug-in 1270-1640nm E81BBS2A

Application software Reference

Optical Fiber Trace Software for post-analysis EOFS100

Optical Fiber Cable Software Cable for Acceptance report generation EOFS200

Internal Printer modules, 8100 series Reference

Internal Printer Module E82PRINTER

304 User Manual 780000102/12

Chapter 18 Options and accessoriesUser manual references

Launch Fiber Modules

User manual references

References of optical connectors and adapters

Launch fiber modules for OTDR demo and test 1 Reference

Launch cable singlemode (1 fiber G652 — 2km) E82LFSM2

Launch cable singlemode (1 fiber G652 — 4 km) E82LFSM4

1. Two optical connectors must be specified when ordering each launch fiber module.

User manuals for MTS/T-BERD plug-ins Reference

User manual for modules, 8100 series (French) E8100M01

User manual for modules, 8100 series (English) E8100M02

User manual for modules, 8100 series (German) E8100M03

Optical connectors for plug-ins1

OTDR Single-mode and WDM Fixed Connector

1. A Connector (fixed or universal) must be specified at time of order

Reference

FC/PC Connector EFCPC

FC/APC Connector (only for single-mode) EFCAPC

E2000 Connector (only for single-mode) EE2000

E2000/HRL Connector (only for single-mode) EE2000HRL

Front Panel Optical connectors for plug-ins1

Multi-mode Universal OTDR Reference

Universal PC Connector with FC adapter EUNIPCFCMM

Universal PC Connector with SC adapter EUNIPCSCMM

User Manual 780000102/12 305

Chapter 18 Options and accessoriesReferences of optical connectors and adapters

Universal PC Connector with ST adapter EUNIPCSTMM

Universal PC Connector with DIN adapter EUNIPCDINMM

1. A Connector (fixed or universal) must be specified at time of order of the plug-in

Front Panel Optical connectors for plug-ins1

Multi-mode Universal OTDR Reference

Front Panel Optical Connectors for plug-ins1

Single-mode Universal OTDR and WDM Connector Reference

Universal PC Connector with FC adapter EUNIPCFC

Universal PC Connector with SC adapter EUNIPCSC

Universal PC Connector with ST adapter EUNIPCST

Universal PC Connector with DIN adapter EUNIPCDIN

Universal PC Connector with LC adapter EUNIPCLC

Universal APC Connector for SM only with FC adapter EUNIAPCFC

Universal APC Connector for SM only with SC adapter EUNIAPCSC

Universal APC Connector for SM only with ST adapter EUNIAPCST

Universal APC Connector for SM only with DIN adapter EUNIAPCDIN

Universal APC Connector for SM only with LC adapter EUNIAPCLC

1. A connector (fixed or universal) must be specified at time of order of the plug-in

Additional Adapters for Universal Connectors1 Reference

Universal FC Adapter EUFCAD

Universal SC Adapter EUSCAD

Universal ST Adapter EUSTAD

Universal DIN Adapter EUDINAD

Universal LC adapter EULCAD

1. Interchangeable in the field

306 User Manual 780000102/12

Appendix A RoHS Information

A

This appendix describes the RoHS (Restriction of Hazardous Substances) information, which are mandatory requirements from China.

The RoHS directive consists in the restriction on the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical or electronic equipment sold or used in the European Union, after July 1, 2006. These substances are: lead, mercury, cadmium, hexavalent chromium, polyubrominated biphenyls, and polybrominated diphenyl ethers.

The follwoing chapters are described:

– “Concerned products : 8100 modules series” on page 308– “Concerned products : OTDR 8100 Modules Series” on page 309– “Concerned products : All OTDR VLR 8100 Modules Series” on

page 310– “Concerned products :PMD and WDM 8100 Modules Series” on

page 311

User Manual 780000102/12 307

Appendix A RoHS InformationConcerned products : 8100 modules series

Concerned products : 8100 modules series Nb 8000 series

“C h ina R oH S ” 电子信息产品污染控制管理办法

（信息产业部第 39 号）

此附录提供”China RoHS”要求的产品环境使用期限和有毒有害物质名称及含量。此附录适用于主

机和它的附件。 产品名称：XXXXXX 环保使用期限

此标识标注在主要产品上表示此产品或它的附件中含有有毒有害物质 （详细信

息见下表）

标志中间的数字代表至生产日期起的环保最大使用年限。正常使用情况下，有

毒有害物质不会发生突变或外泄。这个期限不适用消耗品，例如电池。 正常的操作情况请参考产品的使用手册 生产日期请参考产品的校准证明正本

有毒有害物质名称及含量表识格式 有毒有害物质或元素

部件名称 铅 (Pb) 汞 (Hg) 镉(Cd) 六价铬 (CR6+) 多溴联苯(PBB) 多溴二苯醚

(PBDE) 主机 O O O O O O

印刷电路板 X O O O O O 内部布线 O O O O O O

显示屏 O O O O O O 键盘 O O O O O O 电池 O O O O O O

电源单元 O O O O O O 机电部件 O O O O O O

硬盘 O O O O O O 光模块 O O O O O O

金属外壳部件和夹具 O O O O O O 塑料外壳部件 O O O O O O

标签 O O O O O O 附件 O O O O O O

外部电缆和适配器 O O O O O O 光驱 O O O O O O

操作手册和印刷资料 O O O O O O 软包和硬包 O O O O O O

其他附件 O O O O O O O: 表示该有毒有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在 SJ/T11363-2006. X: 表示该有毒有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出 SJ/T11363-2006.

308 User Manual 780000102/12

Appendix A RoHS InformationConcerned products : OTDR 8100 Modules Series

Concerned products : OTDR 8100 Modules Series8111MM, 8112MM, 8114(DR/HD/SR/SRE/UHD/VHD), 8115(DR/HD/SR/SRE/UHD/VHD), 8117(HD/HD-RC/VHD/VHD-RC), 8123MM, 8126(DR/HD/SR/SRE/UHD/VHD), 8129(UHD/VHD), 8136(HD/UHD), 81BBS(1/2), 815MTAU(2/3), 82PRINTER

“China RoHS” 电子信息产品污染控制管理办法

（信息产业部第39 号）

此附录提供”China RoHS”要求的产品环境使用期限和有毒有害物质名称及含量。此附录适用于主机和它

的附件。

产品名称：XXXXXX

环保使用期限

此标识标注在主要产品上表示此产品或它的附件中含有有毒有害物质 （详细信息见下

表）

标志中间的数字代表至生产日期起的环保最大使用年限。正常使用情况下，有毒有害

物质不会发生突变或外泄。这个期限不适用消耗品，例如电池。

正常的操作情况请参考产品的使用手册 生产日期请参考产品的校准证明正本

有毒有害物质名称及含量表识格式

有毒有害物质或元素 部件名称 铅 (Pb) 汞 (Hg) 镉(Cd) 六价铬(CR6+) 多溴联苯(PBB) 多溴二苯醚

(PBDE) 主机 O O O O O O

印刷电路板 X O O O O O 内部布线 O O O O O O 显示屏 O O O O O O 键盘 O O O O O O 电池 O O O O O O

电源单元 O O O O O O 机电部件 O O O O O O

硬盘 O O O O O O 光模块 O O O O O O

金属外壳部件和夹具 O O O O O O 塑料外壳部件 O O O O O O

标签 O O O O O O 附件 O O O O O O

外部电缆和适配器 O O O O O O 光驱 O O O O O O

操作手册和印刷资料 O O O O O O 软包和硬包 O O O O O O

其他附件 O O O O O O

O: 表示该有毒有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在 SJ/T11363-2006. X: 表示该有毒有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出 SJ/T11363-2006.

User Manual 780000102/12 309

Appendix A RoHS InformationConcerned products : All OTDR VLR 8100 Modules Series

Concerned products : All OTDR VLR 8100 Modules Series8118 VLR(24/38/45/48/49/65), 8118R VLR65, 8128 VLR65, 8138 VLR(24/38/49), 8148 VLR(24/38/49)

“Ch ina R o H S ” 电子信息产品污染控制管理办法

（信息产业部第 39 号）

此附录提供”China RoHS”要求的产品环境使用期限和有毒有害物质名称及含量。此附录适用于主

机和它的附件。 产品名称：XXXXXX 环保使用期限

此标识标注在主要产品上表示此产品或它的附件中含有有毒有害物质 （详细信

息见下表）

标志中间的数字代表至生产日期起的环保最大使用年限。正常使用情况下，有

毒有害物质不会发生突变或外泄。这个期限不适用消耗品，例如电池。 正常的操作情况请参考产品的使用手册 生产日期请参考产品的校准证明正本

有毒有害物质名称及含量表识格式 有毒有害物质或元素

部件名称 铅 (Pb) 汞 (Hg) 镉(Cd) 六价铬(CR6+) 多溴联苯(PBB) 多溴二苯醚(PBDE)

主机 O O O O O O 印刷电路板 O O O O O O

内部布线 O O O O O O 显示屏 O O O O O O

键盘 O O O O O O 电池 O O O O O O

电源单元 O O O O O O 机电部件 O O O O O O

硬盘 O O O O O O 光模块 X O O O O O

金属外壳部件和夹具 O O O O O O 塑料外壳部件 O O O O O O

标签 O O O O O O 附件 O O O O O O

外部电缆和适配器 O O O O O O 光驱 O O O O O O

操作手册和印刷资料 O O O O O O 软包和硬包 O O O O O O

其他附件 O O O O O O O: 表示该有毒有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在 SJ/T11363-2006. X: 表示该有毒有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出 SJ/T11363-2006.

310 User Manual 780000102/12

Appendix A RoHS InformationConcerned products :PMD and WDM 8100 Modules Series

Concerned products :PMD and WDM 8100 Modules Series81PMD, 81WDM, 81WDMPMD

“C h in a R o H S ” 电子信息产品污染控制管理办法

（信息产业部第 39 号）

此附录提供”China RoHS”要求的产品环境使用期限和有毒有害物质名称及含量。此附录适用于主

机和它的附件。 产品名称：XXXXXX 环保使用期限

此标识标注在主要产品上表示此产品或它的附件中含有有毒有害物质 （详细信

息见下表）

标志中间的数字代表至生产日期起的环保最大使用年限。正常使用情况下，有

毒有害物质不会发生突变或外泄。这个期限不适用消耗品，例如电池。 正常的操作情况请参考产品的使用手册 生产日期请参考产品的校准证明正本

有毒有害物质名称及含量表识格式 有毒有害物质或元素

部件名称 铅 (Pb) 汞 (Hg) 镉 (Cd) 六价铬 (CR6+) 多溴联苯 (PBB) 多溴二苯醚(PBDE)

主机 O O O O O O 印刷电路板 X O O O O O

内部布线 O O O O O O 显示屏 O O O O O O

键盘 O O O O O O 电池 O O O O O O

电源单元 O O O O O O 机电部件 O O O O O O

硬盘 O O O O O O 光模块 X O O O O O

金属外壳部件和夹具 O O O O O O 塑料外壳部件 O O O O O O

标签 O O O O O O 附件 O O O O O O

外部电缆和适配器 O O O O O O 光驱 O O O O O O

操作手册和印刷资料 O O O O O O 软包和硬包 O O O O O O

其他附件 O O O O O O O : 表示该有毒有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在 SJ/T11363-2006. X: 表示该有毒有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出 SJ/T11363-2006.

User Manual 780000102/12 311

Appendix A RoHS InformationConcerned products :PMD and WDM 8100 Modules Series

312 User Manual 780000102/12

Index

AAccessories 299Adapter

reference 305switch 19types 18

Attenuation 13, 68, 205Attenuation profile

acquisition parameters 152configuration 150measurement 153measurement parameters 152measurement procedure 156results display 158results table 160

BBackscatter coefficient 3Battery

on microprocessor board 19BBS

activation 238function 238remote interlock connector 240

Bend 51

Bi-directionnal OTDRprinciple of measurement 4

CCD

acquisition parameters 165, 189analysis parameters 166auto acquisition 170Configuration 164, 188detection end of fiber 173end of acquisition 172manual acquisition 171measurement conditions 170measurement on section 180measurement process 169placing markers 175results sreen parameters 167, 190source function 184standards and limits 183, 200

CD ODMAcquisition 196Configuration 188File Management 199Reference Measurement 192Results 197

CD-ROM burning 255Channel filtering (OSA) 120Coefficient of dispersion 10, 11, 12

User Manual 780000102/12 313

Index

Coefficient of reflection 3, 4Commands

external keyboard 35CompactFlash 26Connection

quality 56Connectors

references 305Cursor

2 cursors method 735 cursors method 74movement 38resolution 280selection 39

DData transfer 255DFB

analysis 6configuration 124measurements 125results 126

Distancespecif. OTDR measurement 280

EEDFA

configuration 122measurement 122results 123

Eventmacro 269, 273

Event CD 169, 171, 176Event OTDR 62

icons 65External Keyboard 35

FFault Locator

Bend 78, 79configuration 77function 77

test 78Fibers

standards 14File

configuration 242expedition 251naming 244

GGhosts 53

HHigh sensitivity WDM 105

IIndex of refraction

specifications 280

LLaunch cable 52Lower & upper thresholds (OFI) 208

MMacro

adding interaction 270calling 268Default 272File 269overwrite 271Playback 272recording 268renaming 271Standard 269

Mailfile expedition 251OFI,FOX function 223

Markers (OTDR) 70addition 70delete 71hints 71

User Manual 780000102/12 314

Index

representation 70Measurement

attenuation (specif.) 280distance (specif.) 280principle 1reflectance (specif.) 280reflectometry (specif.) 280

Memorysee File

ModulesBBS (specif.) 295CD (specif.) 290, 292fibers 293MTAU (specif.) 294OTDR range 285PMD (specif.) 290WDM (specif.) 288

MTAUauto mode 232configuration 231manual mode 231sequence test

configuration 233perform 234

OOFI

Attenuator ext. (powermeter) 207FOX 213

configuration 213distant module 221measurement acquisition 220results display 222send message 223taking ref. loss 216taking ref. ORL 218Zero adjustment ORL 219

LTSattenuation measurement 13, 205Configuration 207Connection 206insertion loss measurement 13, 205power measurement 13, 204source configuration 209

Manual ORL 225Measurement acquisition 226reference 225results 226

Power metermeasurements 213ref. measurement 212zero setting 212

Sourceconnection 206

Unitof power 207

Options 299ORL

manual measurement (OFI) 225measurement (OTDR) 75on saturated trace (OTDR) 75

OTDRacquisition parameters 47automatic acquisition 57Configuration 46manual acquisition 59manual measurement

ORL 75manual measurements 71measurement of slope 72measurement of splice and re-flectance 73measurement parameters 49multi-wavelength acquisition 60principle of measurement 2Real time acquisition 55results screen parameters 52table of results 63

contents 65notes 67uncertainty 68

OTDR Bi-dir.acquisition parameters 86adding markers 96cable test 98file management 97measurement parameters 87OEO results 95OEO traces 95Origin and end traces 94performing measurement 88troubleshooting 98

Overlay tracesadding 42display 42removing 44

Overlaying tracesWDM 120

User Manual 780000102/12 315

Index

PPMD

abacus 146acquisition parameters 132configuration 130Display of results 140graphic display 143information messages 144local operator 135measurement parameters 133Measurement procedure 138method used 8principle of measurement 7reference measurement 134remote operator 135results screen parameters 134Spectrum/FFT 140standards and limits 145statistics 142

PMD coefficient 9Printer

exposing 276loading paper 277module function 276printing page 278setting 278

RRef. power (power meter) 212Reflectance

definition 3result in OTDR table 66specif. measurement 280

SScript 235, 273Shift 40

Attenuation Profile 160CD 174, 176CD trace 174, 176PMD 142

Signal threshold WDM) 107

TTable Notes

OTDR 53Technical specifications 279Threshold

OTDRfiber end 50reflections 49splice 49

UUniversal connector

cleaning 19USB memory stick 27, 254User manual

references 305

WWavelength

WDM specifications 288WDM/OSA

acquisition parameters 103Configuration 102difference between 2 traces (OSA) 43display param. and analysis

alarms 111grid 109

measurement parameters 106results display 115SNR parameters 107Table results

notes 119table results 117

ZZoom

Attenuation Profile 159CD 176OTDR 62PMD 142WDM/OSA 114

User Manual 780000102/12 316

Test and Measurement Regional Sales

North AmericaToll Free: 1 800 638 2049Tel: +1 240 404 2999Fax:+1 240 404 2195

Latin AmericaTel: +55 11 5503 3800Fax:+55 11 5505 1598

Asia PacificTel: +852 2892 0990Fax:+852 2892 0770

EMEATel: +49 7121 86 2222Fax:+49 7121 86 1222

www.jdsu.com

8100M02/UM/12-07/AERev. 12, 12-07English